JP6504197B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

The gaming machine pachinko machine or the like, and a lottery whether those Tari become based on the winning of the game balls to start winning opening, there is what is to improve player's interest in the game of Yu technique's.

JP 2003-180999 A

However, there has been a demand for further improvement in the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine that can improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is a ball entering means capable of entering game balls, and first and second regions capable of entering game balls entered into the ball entering means. And sorting means for sorting the gaming ball having entered the ball entering means into one of the first area and the second area, and based on the gaming ball having entered the first area. It is configured to be able to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second area, and the sorting means plays the game to the first area. The weight of gaming balls passing through the sorting means is divided into a first state in which balls are distributed and a second state in which gaming balls are more easily distributed to the second area than the first state. It is variable based on the above, and the player can view the state of the distribution means in the gaming machine. All SANYO configured, which the game ball that reaches into the sorting means is configured to flow down either one of the channel which is branched into a front view front and front view rear side In the second state, the gaming ball having reached the sorting means is more likely to be advantageous to the player in the case of flowing to the front side of the front view than to flow to the rear side of the front view. Ru.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, comprising a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the first area and the second area capable of entering the game ball entered into the ball entering means, the first area A sorting means for sorting the game ball having entered the ball entering means into one of the second areas, and based on the game ball entering the first area, the game is sent to the second area It is configured to be able to shift to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player than when the ball enters the ball, and the distribution means is in a state of distributing the game ball to the first area. It is variable based on the weight of the game ball passing through the sorting means in the 1 state and the second state in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the second area than the first state. There, the gaming machine, der which player the state the distributing means is configured to be visible The gaming ball having reached the sorting means is configured to flow down any of the flow paths branched into the front side and the back side of the front view, and at least the second state the distribution than a game ball that reaches flows down the front view rear side to the means, towards the case of falling in front view the front side has been configured easily be advantageous to the player in. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a figure showing an outline of a lottery device. It is sectional drawing of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is sectional drawing in the modification of the flow path of a lottery apparatus. It is a continuation of the sectional view in the modification of the channel of a lottery device. It is a figure which shows how to distribute the advancing direction of the game ball | bowl by the advancing direction distribution part of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure which shows the outline of the distribution rotary body of a lottery apparatus. It is a figure showing the outline of the entrance distribution part of a lottery device. It is a figure showing an outline in case a game ball passes a back route in the state where the distribution rotary body of a lottery device has swung to the right. It is a figure showing an outline in case a game ball passes a near route in the state where the distribution rotary body of a lottery device has swung to the right. It is a figure showing an outline in case a game ball passes a back route in the state where the distribution rotary body of a lottery device has swung to the left. It is a figure showing an outline in case a game ball passes a near route in the state where the distribution rotation body of a lottery device has swung to the left. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship of the distribution rotary body of a lottery apparatus, and each ball entrance. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM, and (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the hit in the normal symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining an image at the time of power activation. It is the model which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the model which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the structure position initialization process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the gate process for lottery performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the rotary body position detection process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selective processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control procedure. It is the flowchart which showed the special production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command processing which is executed by MPU inside the display control. (A) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is run by MPU inside the display control. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the ROM in the second embodiment, and (b) is a correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 in the second embodiment and the jackpot type in the special symbol It is a schematic diagram which showed typically, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st random number counter C1 in 2nd Embodiment, and the small hit in a special symbol. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting gate processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit control processing 2 which is executed by the MPU in the main control device in 2nd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting control processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 2nd execution form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st contact classification counter C2 in 3rd Embodiment, and the jackpot classification in a special symbol. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by the MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed small hitting control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the flow-path switching process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the small hitting setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 3rd execution form. It is the timing chart which compared the timing of opening and closing of the special winning a prize opening and the timing of opening and closing of the induction passage in 3rd execution form It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically the correspondence of the state of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment, and the presentation performed. (A) is a figure showing the fluctuation pattern production which becomes a big hit in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing the production performed during a big hit game. (A) is a figure which showed the chance up pattern of fluctuation pattern production in a 4th embodiment, and (b) is a figure showing the chance up pattern of fluctuation pattern production used as a big hit. (A) is a figure showing an effect performed during a jackpot game when re-entering a loop state in the fourth embodiment, (b) is executed in a jackpot game transitioning to a low probability state after completion FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed fluctuation pattern selective processing 2 which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot production processing which is executed by the MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 4th execution form.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 17) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The player can change the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or change the content of the effect of super reach, for example, by the player. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, 3 of “town stage,” “empty stage,” and “island stage”. There are two stages. Then, various effects such as fluctuation effects and reach effects that are performed along with entering the first ball entry port 64 described later (start winning) are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage It is done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effects are not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, "town stage" → "empty stage → → "island stage" → "in the city stage" → ... It changes repeatedly in the following order. Further, immediately after the power is turned on, a "town stage" is set as an initial stage.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach effect is started, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the effect mode of the super reach during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach. If the player operates the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and driving of the ball launch unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Sensor 51a, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance (Not shown) is built in. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed when the ball enters the first entrance 64, and a normal symbol (first) when the ball passes the second entrance 67. 2) The lottery will be held. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, the determination of whether or not it is a big hit of the special symbol is performed, and when it is determined that the big symbol is a special symbol, the big hit type The determination of is also made. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is closed until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses) or 10 balls are won ) The opening is repeated five times (five rounds). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. As a jackpot type of special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided, and after the end of the special game state as a added value after the jackpot end, on the game according to these jackpot types The player's value (game value) is given to the player.

  In addition, when the drawing of the special symbol (the first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, The special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball enters the first entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display It is shown by the device 37 and also in the third symbol display device 81. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started. The special winning opening 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, is provided immediately below the first ball entry port 64. Therefore, during the special game state, the player strikes a ball in an attempt to win a special winning opening 65a, so many balls enter the first ball entrance 64 as well. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first entrance 64 is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the second ball entrance 67, a pass / fail determination of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the symbol is hit normally, the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the first entrance 64. It will be in the state. That is, when it comes to the hit of the normal symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83 and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, The normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the second entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol display device 37 , And is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the second entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display according to the lottery Is started.

  As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, there are provided two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B". The "big hit A" and the "big hit B" both have a maximum round number of 8 rounds.

  "Big jack A" and "Big jack B" are flow channel switching valve 331a, in the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery apparatus 300 (see FIG. 5) after the winning of the jackpot is decided. According to 331b (see FIG. 9), there is a difference as to whether the flow path through which the game ball passes is divided into the flow path on the front side of the rotary body 341 (front route) or the flow path on the eyebrow side (back route). That is, in the "big hit A", it is switched to the flow passage on the near side (front route) (see Fig. 9 (b)), and in the "big hit B", it is switched to the flow passage on the weir side (back route) (Fig. 9 See (a)).

  Here, the “front side” and the “back side” of the distribution rotating body 341 respectively indicate the front side or the back side for the player, and in the case of the front side flow path (front side route), a pachinko machine 10 is a flow path on the side closer to the player who is playing a game at 10 (the side farther from the base plate 60), and in the case of the back side flow path (back route), the side farther to the player (on the base plate 60) It is a flow path on the near side).

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16, whether it is the back side flow path or the front side flow path (that is, the state of the flow path switching valves 331 a and 331 b) According to the state of the distribution rotary body 341 disposed immediately below the valves 331a and 331b, the short insertion ball opening 501 provided under the distribution rotary body 341 and the probability change ball entrances 502 to 504 are provided. It is distributed to which ball entry the game ball enters the ball. In addition, when the game ball enters the time-saving ball entrance 501, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end and for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of changes is 100 times) It becomes a state. On the other hand, when the gaming ball enters one of the probability changing ball entrances 502 to 504, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends.

  When the flow path switching valve 331a is set to the flow path on the near side (the front route), the game ball entered into the drawing gate 310 of the drawing apparatus 300 is distributed by the distribution rotating body 341, And it is distributed to either of the probability variation winning opening 504. Therefore, when it is set to the flow path on the front side (front route), it always shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end. On the other hand, when it is set to the flow path (奧 route) on the back side, the game ball entered into the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is divided by the rotating member 341 by the time-saving ball entry 501 and the probability entry ball entry Since it is distributed to either of 503, when it is distributed to the time-saving entrance ball socket 501, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end and for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of changes is 100 times) a normal symbol The time is short. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the probability change ball entrance 503 by the distribution rotary body 341, the state is shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit.

  Here, "high probability state of special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol thereafter is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, while the probability fluctuation of the so-called special symbol (during the variation of the special symbol) In other words, it is the state of the game which is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbol" refers to the time when the probability change is not in progress, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, the jackpot probability is lower than the probability change. Also, among the "special symbol low probability state" and the time saving state (time and day middle) of the normal symbol, while the jackpot probability is a normal state, only the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is up with the jackpot probability unchanged It refers to a gaming state in which a ball is likely to enter the first ball entrance 64. In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the normal symbol, the time when the electric character (not shown) attached to the first ball entry port 64 opens, or a single hit The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation As a stop symbol after the end, the special symbol (the first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown in the lighted state or the variation of the ball entering the first entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display of the special symbol (the first symbol) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of ball entry is held up to four times at maximum The holding ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to four times, and is three times or less Alternatively, it may be set to five or more times (for example, eight times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) The special symbol (the first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37 using it as a trigger. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inches in size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right The columns are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 is used to display the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is performed according to the request. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 20) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. Also in the case of "big hit A" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery apparatus 300 are switched to the near route, also in the case of "big hit B" in which the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the lottery apparatus 300 are switched to the back route. A variable display is performed in which main symbols to which any number among "0" to "9" is added are aligned. That is, from the main symbols displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it can not be distinguished whether it is "big hit A" or "big hit B". In addition, as above-mentioned, the special symbol (1st symbol) according to jackpot classification is displayed on LED37a. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  Although details will be described later, when the game ball enters the lottery apparatus 300 in a state where the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is set to the near route, the ball is disposed on the near side of the ball sorting unit 340 It will enter the ball in either the ball hole 502 or the ball hole 504, and it will shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, regardless of which ball entrance. On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lottery apparatus 300 in a state where the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to the near route, the time-shorting ball socket provided on the back side of the ball sorting unit 340 It becomes to enter either of 501 or the probability change ball entrance 503, and there is a possibility of shifting to a low probability state of a special symbol after a big hit. Therefore, since winning the "big hit A" is more advantageous for the player than winning the "big hit B", the player is made to play a game expecting to win the "big hit A" be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper 1/3 of the sub-display area Ds is used to display the notice effect, the character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. The announcement effect is performed by taking out and the like.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of a normal symbol performed as the ball passes through the second ball entry port 67 is being executed by a lighting state, or As a stop symbol after the end of fluctuation, the normal symbol (the second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is shown by the lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67, the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol "o"), the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 operates for a predetermined time. It becomes a state (it is open | released), and as a result, it is comprised so that it may be in the state which a ball | bowl easily enters into the 1st ball entrance 64. FIG. The number of times the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and also displayed in the second symbol holding lamp 84 as well. Ru. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variation display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and also the first symbol display device 37 And you may make it carry out using a part of 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the passage of the ball in the second ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times the maximum number of holding balls, as in the first ball entrance 64, and is three times or less, or five times or more (For example, eight times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  A lottery device 300 for lottery whether or not to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after a big hit is disposed in the right direction in a front view with respect to the variable display unit 80. The lottery apparatus 300 is provided with a lottery gate 310 which is opened based on winning a big win (see FIG. 5), and while the lottery gate 310 is opened, the lottery gate 310 is entered. Based on the game ball having entered the ball entering one of the probability changing ball openings 502 to 504 inside the lottery device 300, the state is shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when the gaming ball entered the lottery gate 310 enters the short time ball entry port 501 inside the lottery apparatus 300, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends and for a predetermined number of fluctuation times. (For example, the number of times of change is 100 times) It becomes a time saving state of a normal symbol.

  The details of the lottery apparatus 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a view showing the appearance of the lottery apparatus 300. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the lottery apparatus 300 includes a lottery gate 310, a channel 320, a traveling direction distribution unit 330, a ball inlet distribution unit 340, and a ball discharge unit 350. The gaming balls having entered the gate 310 are discharged to the outside of the lottery apparatus 300 through the ball discharging unit 350 through the flow path 320, the traveling direction distributing unit 330, and the ball inlet distributing unit 340.

  Flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are provided inside the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the flow-down positions of the game balls are distributed according to the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b You can switch between back and forth. In addition, inside the ball inlet distribution unit 340, a distribution rotating body 341 is disposed swingably. Although details will be described later, the distribution rotating body 341 is provided with four passages (guide passages 408a to 408d), and each passage is associated with the short time ball entry 501 and the probability change ball entry 502 to 504. It is done.

  In addition, the cover part 332 which is the outer wall part of the advancing direction distribution part 330, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b disposed inside the advancing direction allocation part 330 are all transparent members (for example, PS material etc.) It consists of Similarly, a cover portion 423 which is an outer wall portion of the ball inlet distribution portion 340, and a distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the ball inlet distribution portion 340 are also made of transparent members. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotary body 341 during the game. As a result, the player can check the game balls passing through the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the distribution rotary body 341, so that the game ball is a short time ball entry 501 and a definite change ball entry 502-504. It is possible to visually observe which of the entrances the ball enters. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the special symbol high probability state will be reached after the end of the jackpot. In addition, since it is possible to visually observe the game ball flowing down, the player is expected to enter one of the probability change ball entrances 502 to 504 while the game ball is flowing down. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Further, by making the player visually recognize the state of the flow of the game ball until entering the ball entrance, it is possible to recognize that the lottery is being performed fairly, and the player is pachinko It is possible to suppress the feeling of distrust in the aircraft 10 and the hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the flow path 320 provided in the lottery apparatus 300 will be described. FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing the configuration of the flow path 320 and the operation of the gaming ball advanced to the flow path 320. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, the flow path 320 includes a guiding passage 321 through which gaming balls entered from the lottery gate 310 pass, and a guiding passage 322 guiding the passing gaming balls to the traveling direction distributing unit 330, Either one of the ball discharge passage 323 for guiding the passing game ball to the discharge port for discharging to the outside, the guide passage 322, or the ball discharge passage 323 is closed, and the game ball is advanced to one of the passages And a passage closing valve 324. The passage closing valve 324 is driven by a solenoid (not shown), and the direction of FIG. 6A (ie, the direction in which the guiding passage 322 is opened and the ball discharging passage 323 is closed) based on winning of the big hit. And switch.

  After winning the jackpot, the game ball which first entered the lottery gate 310 and flowed down the induction passage 321 reaches the passage closing valve 324 (FIG. 6A), the short closing valve 324 b of the passage closing valve 324 Contact Since the passage closing valve 324 is configured to pivot about the shaft 324c, the gaming ball contacts the short closing valve 324b, and the weight by the gaming ball is applied to the short closing valve 324b, thereby shortening the shorting valve. A downward force acts on the closing valve 324 b, and the short closing valve 324 b pivots until it strikes the inner wall of the guiding passage 322. By rotating the short closing valve 324b, the gaming ball advances to the guiding passage 322, and the guiding passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324a, and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened (FIG. 6 (b)). .

  The guiding passage 322 is closed by the long closing valve 324 a and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened, and thereafter the ball enters the drawing gate 310 and all gaming balls flowing down the guiding passage 321 are ball discharging passages 323. It will be discharged through (Fig. 6 (c)). Thereby, since the game ball which can advance to guidance passage 322 can be restricted to one ball, the game ball which advances to entrance distribution part 340 arranged in the latter part of guidance passage 322 is assured. It can be limited to only one ball. Therefore, generation | occurrence | production of the malfunction that several game ball ball-enters into the ball-into-lock hole in any one of time saving ball-in ball-opening ball-opening 501 and probability change ball-in ball-opening 502-504 can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the passage closing valve 324 is configured to rotate with the weight of the gaming ball, but passage of the gaming ball is detected using a known sensor means or the like, and guidance is performed based on the detection result of the sensor means It may be configured to control the opening and closing of the passages 322, 323. Hereinafter, as a modification of the flow path 320 of the first embodiment, the configuration of the flow path 320 using the sensor means will be described using FIGS. 7 and 8.

  FIGS. 7 and 8 are schematic views schematically showing a configuration in which the number of gaming balls that can advance to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and thereafter using the sensor means can be limited to only one. In the flow path 320 of this modification, a sprocket 601, ball passage sensors 602a and 602b, a lever 604, and a ball passage sensor 603b are provided between the induction passage 321 and the induction passage 322, and a passage closing valve is further provided. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the short shutoff valve 324b is not provided at 324.

  When the gaming ball entering the lottery gate 310 travels through the guiding path 321 and reaches the sprocket 601, the projection 601a of the sprocket 601 prevents the game ball from advancing. It is determined based on the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602a whether the game ball whose progress is stopped by the sprocket is permitted to flow down. Specifically, after the lottery gate 310 is opened, passage of the ball is permitted until passage of the ball is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a, and the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise by the motor means or the like, and the game ball is rotated. It becomes possible to flow down the induction passage 321.

  When the gaming ball flows down the single ball guiding passage 321, the ball passing sensor 602a detects the falling of the ball, and the convex portion 601a of the sprocket 601 projects into the guiding passage 321. Therefore, all the game balls that entered the lottery gate 310 and then flowed down the guiding passage 321 are prevented from advancing by the projections 601 a of the sprockets 601.

  On the other hand, the game ball whose passage is detected by the ball passage sensor 602a is prevented from advancing again by the lever 604 (FIG. 7A). The lever 604 operates to close or open the flow path according to the state of the ball passage sensor 602 b, the ball passage sensors 603 a and 603 b, and the passage closing valve 324.

  The lever 604 first rotates counterclockwise around the axis 604 based on the ball passing sensor 602 b detecting the arrival of the ball on the top of the lever 604. Then, when the lever 604 is sufficiently rotated and does not disturb the passage, the gaming ball stopped at the upper part of the lever 604 starts to flow down again (FIG. 7 (b)). Then, based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the guiding passage 322 is detected by the ball passing sensors 603a and 603b, the lever 604 rotates clockwise about the shaft 604a and protrudes again to the guiding passage 321. Prevents the progress of other game balls. Further, based on the detection results of the ball passage sensors 603a and 603b, the passage closing valve 324 falls in the direction of the ball discharge passage 323, and the ball discharge passage 323 is opened (FIG. 7C). As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball other than the game ball having advanced to the guiding passage 322 from proceeding to the guiding passage 322, and to discharge the game ball from the ball discharging passage 323.

  While the passage closing valve 324 is in the state of falling, the lever 604 is controlled not to operate (that is, the guiding passage 322 is kept closed) regardless of the detection result of the ball passage sensor 602b. Further, the sprocket 601 is rotated clockwise based on the fact that the passage closing valve 324 falls and the ball discharging passage 323 is opened, and only one game ball is made to flow down the guiding passage 321. Then, in a state where the passage closing valve 324 is fallen, the ball passing sensors 602a and 602b are controlled to cause the game ball to flow down whenever the passage of the game ball is detected (FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 8 (b).

  As described above, the configuration of the flow path 320 for advancing the gaming ball having entered the lottery gate 310 to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and subsequent ones has been described, but the configuration of the flow path 320 is the same as that of this embodiment. It is not limited. As an example of the other configuration, for example, instead of the passage closing valve 324 of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent passage of the playing ball downstream by one game ball from the shaft 324 c of the passage closing valve 324 By providing a shutter and closing the shutter portion, the game ball entering the lottery gate 310 is configured so that only one ball is stopped at the shutter portion. Since only a space for one game ball is provided in the shutter portion, the other game balls can not be parked in the shutter portion connected to the guiding path 322 by stopping the game ball in the shutter portion, Proceed to the ball discharge passage 324. Then, the shutter portion may be opened after a lapse of a sufficient time after the lottery gate 310 is closed, and the gaming ball held in the shutter portion may be advanced to the guiding passage 322. With this configuration, it is possible to limit the number of gaming balls advancing to the distribution rotary body 341 to only one ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 on which the gaming balls having flowed down the guiding passage 322 of the flow passage 320 enter will be described. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As shown in FIG. FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view of the traveling direction distribution unit 330, the flow path 320 joined to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the ball inlet distribution unit 340 when viewed from the side direction of the gaming board. In both of FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B, the base plate 60 is disposed in the rightward direction. As shown in FIG. 9, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 includes flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and a cover portion 332, and the traveling direction of the game ball is in the front direction or the back direction with respect to the game board. It is distributed to one of them.

  The flow path switching valves 331 a and 331 b are both electrically connected to the flow path solenoid 265 and configured to be inclined in the same direction and to stand still. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined in the right direction (that is, the rear side for the player), the gaming ball is in the right direction (that is, the rear side for the player) ), And flow down to the far side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are inclined in the left direction (that is, the front side for the player), the gaming ball is in the left direction (that is, for the player). Advance to the front side), and flow downward to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341.

  Next, the ball sorting unit 340 of the lottery apparatus 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. The ball sorting unit 340 is for distributing the game balls to any of the ball entrances among the time-saving ball entrance 501 or the probability change ball outlets 502 to 504. In the present description, first, an outline of each drawing will be described.

  10 is a perspective view (FIG. 10 (a), (b)), a side view (FIG. 10 (c)), of the sorting rotating body 341 disposed swingably in the entrance sorting portion 340. And FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the entire ball inlet distribution unit 340. 12 to 15 schematically show the operation of the sorting rotary body 341 and the gaming ball when the gaming ball enters each of the time-short entering ball opening 501 and the probability changing entering ball openings 502 to 504. It is a schematic diagram. Furthermore, FIG. 16 is a schematic view schematically showing the positional relationship between the sorting rotor 341 and the time-saving ball entry port 501 and the probability transformation ball entry 502 to 504 when the sorting rotor 341 is viewed from the vertical direction. It is.

  The sorting rotary body 341 is configured to have four guiding paths 408a to 408d through which the game balls can pass (see FIG. 10B). Further, the distribution rotating body 341 is configured to be able to swing in the left and right direction around the shaft 406, and the gaming ball can pass through the guiding passages 408a and 408b according to the direction in which the derivative 341 swings. And the state where the gaming ball can pass through the guiding passages 408c and 408d is switched, and in the initial arrangement, the gaming ball can pass through the guiding passages 408a and 408b (ie, shown in FIG. 10A). Like the right side). The initial arrangement is returned by the rotation motor 264 when the RAM erase switch 122 is operated at power-on. In addition, the game ball which reaches the distribution rotary body 341 jumps out of the ball entry distribution section 340 without entering the ball entrances (time short ball entrance 501, and probability change ball entrances 502 to 504). In order to suppress the problem, the distribution rotating body 341 is surrounded on all sides by the cover portion 423.

  Although the details will be described later, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408b, the derivative 341 swings under the weight of the ball by reaching the ball stopping portion 403a after reaching down the inclined portion 403b and standing still. The state is switched to the state (FIG. 10 (b)) in which the game ball can pass through the guiding passages 408c and 408d. In addition, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408c, the derivative 341 swings under the weight of the ball by the gaming ball reaching the ball stopper 405a down the inclined portion 405b and being rocked by the weight of the guiding passage 408a, It switches to the state (FIG. 10A) in which the game ball can pass through 408b. And, when the game ball passes the induction passage 408a and 408d, the distribution rotary body 341 does not swing and the state does not switch.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the inside of the entrance distribution unit 340, the sort rotating body 341 stands still in a state of being inclined in the left direction (FIG. 11 (b)) or in the right direction (FIG. 11 (a)). In the case of standing still in the left inclined state (FIG. 11 (a)), the upper end of the guiding path 408c, 408d is located just below the entrance 411, so the game has passed through the entrance 411. The ball passes through the guiding passage 408c or 408d. On the other hand, when the sort rotating body 341 is stationary in the state of being inclined in the right direction (FIG. 11 (b)), the upper end of the guiding passage 408a, 408b is located just below the ball entrance 411. The game ball having passed 411 passes through the induction passage 408a or 408b.

  The gaming ball having passed through the guiding passage 408 a enters the short time ball entry port 501 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharging passage 419. Further, the gaming ball having passed through the guiding passage 408 b enters into the probability changing ball inlet 502 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharging passage 416. Further, the gaming ball having passed through the guiding passage 408 c enters the probability changing ball inlet 503 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharging passage 417. Then, the gaming ball having passed through the guiding passage 408d enters the probability changing ball inlet 504 and is discharged to the outside through the ball discharging passage 418. It is detected by the prize sensors 420a to 420d respectively provided in the ball discharging passages 416 to 419 at the rear stage of each ball inlet about which ball inlet has been balled. Based on the detection results of these winning sensors 420a to 420d, it is determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit. Further, the ball discharge passages 416 to 420 are configured to merge with the ball discharge passage 421 downstream. The ball discharging passage 421 is provided with a discharge ball sensor 422 for detecting a game ball to be discharged.

  Further, a magnet 407 a is provided on the side of the distribution rotary body 341 at a position 15 mm upstream of the shaft 406 that pivotally supports the distribution rotary body 341. In addition, a magnet 407 b is provided on the inner wall of the cover portion 423 of the ball sorting unit 340 at a position overlapping the magnet 407 a in a state where the distributing rotary body 341 is not swung to the right or to the left (upright state). It is done. Further, the magnets 407a and the magnets 407b are installed in the direction in which they repel each other when the distributing rotary body 341 swings and rotates to the upright position. Therefore, even if the distributing rotary body 341 is slightly oscillated around the shaft 406 by applying vibration to the distributing rotary body 341, the magnet 407a provided on the side surface of the distributing rotary body 341, and Since the magnets 407 b provided on the inner wall portion of the ball opening distribution unit 340 repel each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution rotating body 341 from rotating beyond the portion of the magnet 407 b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the switching of the state of the allocation rotary body 341 even though the gaming ball has not passed through the guiding path 408b or 408c. The magnets 407 a are respectively provided on the front side and the back side of the distribution rotary body 341. Similarly, the magnets 407 b are respectively provided on the front side and the back side of the cover portion 423.

  Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 15, operations of the distribution rotating body 341 and the gaming balls when the gaming balls pass through the respective passages of the distribution rotating body 341 will be described. First, referring to FIG. 12, when the gaming ball travels to the induction passage 408a (ie, the traveling direction of the gaming ball is distributed backward by the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the distribution rotary body 341 is inclined rightward Case) will be described.

  The game ball advanced to the induction passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) flows down the back side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 12 (b)), and drops from the lower end of the sorting rotor 341 Then, it enters the short time entry ball opening 501 and passes through the ball discharge passage 419. For this reason, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408a, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end and also becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of changes is 100). . In addition, since the flow path passing through the induction passage 408a is merely flowing down along the floor portion 401, a force acts to swing the distributing rotary body 341 when the gaming ball passes the induction passage 408a. There is no problem, and the distribution rotating body 341 continues to keep swinging to the right (that is, the state in which the guiding passages 408a and 408b come directly below the ball entry port 411). Therefore, the gaming ball passing through the ball entry port 411 next passes through any one of the guiding paths 408a and 408b. In addition, the partition plate 412 is provided in the lower part of the distribution rotary body 341 (refer FIG. 11). By this partition plate 412, it is suppressed that the game ball which has flowed down the guiding passage 408a does not enter the time-time ball entry port 501 on the back side and enters the positive-change ball entry port 502 on the near side.

  Next, referring to FIG. 13, when the gaming ball travels to the guiding passage 408b (ie, the traveling direction distributing unit 330 distributes the traveling direction of the gaming ball forward-handed, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves to the right In the case of an inclined state) will be described.

  When the gaming ball enters the guiding passage 408b, first, the gaming ball reaches the ball stopper 403a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 403b. Since the ball stopper 403a extends in the vertical direction (that is, also in the direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the game ball) with respect to the floor portion 401, the game ball is prevented from advancing and is in contact with the ball stopper 403a Stand still (Fig. 13 (a)). Then, when the gaming ball is stopped at the ball holding portion 403a, a load due to the weight of the gaming ball is applied to the ball holding portion 403a, and a force acts to push the ball holding portion 403a downward.

  When the ball stopper portion 403a is pushed down, the distribution rotating body 341 rotates around the shaft 406, and becomes the direction of FIG. 13 (b). Since the ball stopper 403a is inclined to the lower right in FIG. 13 (b) in the direction of FIG. 13 (b), the gaming ball flows down along the inclined portion 413 and moves to the ball socket 502 with certainty. It enters the ball and passes through the ball discharge passage 416. For this reason, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408b, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, after the game ball falls, the distribution rotary body 341 continues to keep the state of swinging to the left as shown in FIG. 13C (that is, the state where the guiding paths 408c and 408d come directly below the ball entrance 411). . Therefore, the gaming ball passing through the ball entry port 411 next passes through any one of the guiding paths 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the gaming ball having flowed down the guiding passage 408b enters the certainty ball socket 501 on the near side. It is suppressing that the ball is entered into the short-time ball entrance 501 on the back side without doing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 14, when the gaming ball travels to the derivative passage 408c (that is, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 distributes the traveling direction of the gaming ball backwards, and the distribution rotating body 341 moves leftward In the case of an inclined state) will be described.

  When the gaming ball enters the guiding passage 408c, first, the gaming ball reaches the ball stop portion 405a via the floor portion 401 and the inclined portion 405b. Since the ball stopper 405a extends in the vertical direction (that is, also in the direction perpendicular to the direction of movement of the game ball) with respect to the floor 401, the game ball is prevented from advancing and is in contact with the ball stopper 405a Stand still (Fig. 14 (a)). Then, when the gaming ball is stopped at the ball holding portion 405a, a load due to the weight of the gaming ball is applied to the ball holding portion 405a, and a force acts to push the ball holding portion 405a downward.

  When the ball stopper portion 405a is pushed down, the distribution rotary body 341 rotates about the shaft 406, and becomes the direction of FIG. 14 (b). When it becomes the direction of FIG. 14 (b), the ball stopper 405a is inclined to the lower left direction in FIG. 14 (b), so the gaming ball flows down along the inclined portion 414 and enters into the ball socket 503. The ball will pass through the ball discharge passage 417. For this reason, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408c, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, the distribution rotating body 341 continues to keep the state of swinging to the right as shown in FIG. 14C (that is, the state in which the guiding paths 408a and 408b come directly below the ball entry port 411) even after the game ball falls. Therefore, the gaming ball passing through the entrance 411 will pass either one of the guiding paths 408a and 408b. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotary body 341 (see FIG. 11), the gaming ball having flowed down the guiding passage 408c enters the ball ball 503 of the back side It is suppressed that the ball is entered into the ball socket 504 on the near side without entering.

  Next, referring to FIG. 15, when the gaming ball travels to induction passage 408d (that is, the traveling direction distribution unit 330 distributes the traveling direction of the gaming ball forward-handed, and the distribution rotating body 341 is leftward In the case of an inclined state) will be described.

  The game ball advanced to the induction passage 408d (FIG. 15 (a)) flows down the near side of the passage wall 402 along the floor portion 401 (FIG. 15 (b)) and falls from the lower end of the distribution rotating body 341 Then, the ball enters the ball socket 504 and passes through the ball discharge passage 418. For this reason, when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408d, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, since the flow path passing through the induction passage 408d is merely flowing down along the floor portion 401, a force acts to swing the distributing rotary body 341 when the gaming ball passes the induction passage 408d. There is no such situation, and the distribution rotating body 341 continues to keep swinging to the left (that is, the state in which the guiding passages 408 c and 408 d come directly below the ball entry port 411). Therefore, the gaming ball passing through the ball entry port 411 next passes through any one of the guiding paths 408c and 408d. Further, as described above, since the partition plate 412 is provided at the lower part of the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 11), the gaming ball which has flowed down the guiding passage 408d enters the certainty ball socket 504 on the near side. It is suppressed that the ball enters the ball hole 503 on the back side with certainty.

  As described above, depending on which of the four passages provided in the sorting rotor 341 passes, the gaming ball is either the hour-short insertion ball opening 501 or the probability change insertion ball opening 502-504. Distributed to the entrance of the

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the positional relationship between the distribution rotary body 341 and the time-saving ball entry port 501 and the probability variation ball entry ports 502 to 504 will be described. Fig. 16 (a) is a view showing a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the ball entrance 411 of the ball entrance distribution unit 340, and Fig. 16 (b) Is a view showing a state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left and stands still, as viewed from the direction of the entrance 411 of the entrance 340. As shown in FIGS. 16 (a) and 16 (b), a short time ball entry port 501 is disposed on the right back side of the distribution rotary body 341, and a positive transformation ball entry 502 is disposed on the right front side. Therefore, when the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the right, there is a possibility that the ball may enter either the time-shortening ball entry port 501 or the probability changing ball entry port 502. On the other hand, on the far left side of the sorting rotary body 341, a definite transformation ball inlet 503 is disposed, and on the left front side, a definite transformation ball inlet 504 is disposed. Therefore, when the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the left, there is a possibility that the ball may enter either of the probability changing ball entrances 503 and 504.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 16, the gaming apparatus determines whether the lottery device 300 shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends or shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. It is specified based on the entered ball entrance (one of the time-shorted ball entrance 501 and the probability changing ball entrance 502-504). The game balls are distributed to one of the ball entrances according to the state of the flow path by the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the direction of the distribution rotary body 341 (rightward or leftward).

  The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b changes according to the winning jackpot type, whether it is the near route or the back route, and the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 is the guiding passage 408a It changes according to which passage of 408 d is passed.

  When the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408 a in a state where the distributing rotating body 341 swings to the right (that is, a state where the guiding passages 408 a and 408 b come directly below the entrance 411), the state of the distributing rotating member 341 changes. Instead, the game ball enters the time-saving ball entry port 501, with the swinging state to the right. Therefore, even when the player wins a jackpot next time, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed again to the guiding passage 408a, the low probability state of the special symbol will be continuously reached. There is a case.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408b in a state where the distribution rotary body 341 swings to the right, the distribution rotary body 341 rotates leftward centering on the shaft 406 based on the weight of the game ball and the game ball Enters the ball socket 502 with probability change. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot next time, the game ball reaches the rotating body 341 with the distributing rotating body 341 swinging to the left (that is, the state in which the guiding paths 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). In the next lottery, the game ball will enter the either one of the probability change ball slot 503 or the probability change ball slot 504. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the induction passage 408b, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit always ends in the next big hit It is

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408c in a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left (that is, a state in which the guiding passage 408c, 408d comes directly below the entrance 411), Based on the rotation of the distributing rotary body 341 about the axis 406 in the right direction, the gaming ball enters the ball entry ball slot 503. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot next time, the game ball reaches the rotating body 341 with the distributing rotating body 341 swinging to the right (that is, the state in which the guiding paths 408a and 408b come directly below the entrance 411). In the next lottery, the game ball will enter the time-shorted ball entrance 501 or the probability change ball entrance 502. That is, in the next jackpot, there is also the possibility of transitioning to the special symbol high probability state after the end of the jackpot, or transition to the special symbol low probability state.

  Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the guiding path 408d with the distribution rotary body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotary body 341 remains unchanged (that is, remains swinging to the left side). Enters the ball socket 504 with probability change. Therefore, even when the player wins a jackpot next time, since the sorting rotary body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left, in the next lottery, the game is made to either one of the definite change ball entrance 503 or the definite change ball entrance 504 The ball will enter the ball. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit always ends in the next big hit It is

  As described above, if the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left, the player is transferred to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit regardless of which of the guiding paths 408c and 408d the game ball passes through, so the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 will be the high probability state of the special symbol simply by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, and the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 The situation of can be confirmed with confidence.

  On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery result by the drawing device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. And both anticipation for the transition and a sense of anxiety for the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotary body 341 is confirmed, and if it is swinging to the left, it gives a sense of security to the player, and if it is swinging to the right, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  Furthermore, if the gaming balls are distributed to the induction passage 408b or the induction passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is finalized, the player is secured with three jackpots of jackpots that will win in the high probability state of the special symbol to shift after the next jackpot, next jackpot, and the next jackpot. It is possible to recognize that the player is present, to give the player a great sense of satisfaction, and to improve the player's interest in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main control device 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after the predetermined time (variation time) has passed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (8 round jackpot) in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out from the normal time. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated eight times (eight rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, a special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided. Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, the box base side and the box are removed. It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and performing dispensing of a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17), for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, as a part of the fixed value data described above, the first random number table 202a, the first type selection table 202b, and the second random number table 202c. , Fluctuation pattern selection table 202d is stored at least.

  The first random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the random number counter C1 (not shown) is stored. The details of the first random number table 202a will be described later together with the description of the first random number counter C1. The first hit type selection table 202b (FIG. 19B) is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described later together with the description of the first hit type counter C2.

  The second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 19 (c)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. The details of the second random number table 202c will be described later together with the description of the second random number counter C4. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the determination value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display pattern of the fluctuation pattern is set for each display pattern. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In main controller 110, lottery of special symbols, lottery of ordinary symbols, setting of display in first symbol display device 37, setting of display in second symbol display device 83, and setting of display in third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. Used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to

  In order to select the jackpot type of the special symbol and the first random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the special symbol, in the drawing of the special symbol and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first contact type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type of the out of special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first contact random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 34) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is a first ball entrance The values of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored according to the timing of entering the ball 64, respectively. The RAM 203 is also provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and in each of these areas, a ball is on the left and right The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored according to the timing of passing through any one of the second ball entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the storage area 203a. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is special When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the special symbol is the jackpot. In addition, this special symbol big hit random number table is for high probability of special symbol (period during the low probability state of special symbol) and high probability of high probability of becoming special jackpot from the low probability (special symbol) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot. The special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for high probability of special symbol and the special symbol big hit random number table (not shown) for low probability of special symbol are in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and adds one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) And return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol hold of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the ball storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is not a random number to be a big hit of a special symbol, that is, if it is a random number to be a special symbol out of order, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that will be the big win of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 The display mode is for the jackpot of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In this first random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are three random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number "7, 107, 282" is the special symbol for low probability It is stored in the jackpot random number table. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 3, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/100".

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random number values that become the jackpot of the special symbol, and the value is "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability Is stored in As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 300, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 30, so the probability of being a big symbol of a special symbol is "1/10".

  In the present embodiment, the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value for the big hit stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers are set to be the respective jackpots. Here, if there is a value that is always used regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 as a random number value that will be a jackpot, the random number value may be input from the outside, and it may be easy to illegally attract a jackpot. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state of special symbol or low probability state of special symbol), change the random number value to be a big hit Since it can be made difficult to predict the random number value which becomes the jackpot of a special symbol by this, suppression against fraud can be aimed at.

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, as shown in FIG. 19B, the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 49” in the first hit type counter C2 is “jackpot A”. In addition, the jackpot type when the value is “50 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined by the value of the random number indicated by the first hit type counter C2. In addition, the random number value for determining the big hit type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the first hit type selection table 202b (refer to FIG. 19B). The table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach is generated, the final stop design shifts by only one before and after the reach design. "Launch front and back out of reach" (for example, 98, 99) and "Leach other than front and back out of reach" (for example, in the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop design stops at other than front and back Three stop (rendering) patterns are selected with "complete out" (e.g., a range of 0 to 89) in which a reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the special symbol holding ball storage of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 It is stored in the area 203a.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Moreover, in this embodiment, this table is divided into those for high probability of special symbol and low probability for special symbol, and the range of the random number value set for each stop type of out according to the table Is changing. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

  For example, in the high probability state, a table for high probability when the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is wide 0 to 89 so that reach effect is not selected more than necessary since jackpots are easily generated Is selected, and "complete removal" is likely to be selected. In this table, "longitudinal outreach" narrows to 98, 99 and "non back and forth out of reach" also narrows to 90 to 97, making "front and back out of reach" and "reach other than back and forth out of reach" difficult to select. In the low probability state, in order to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is as narrow as 0 to 79. Table is selected and it becomes difficult to select "completely out".

  In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than back and forth deviation” is wide as 80 to 97, and “reach other than back and forth deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random value corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear outreach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern table (not shown) storing a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110 There is.

  In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various is specified as the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various" shared normal reach ", various" shared super reach ", various" shared special reach ", as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A" special " Various types of reach are defined, and various types of shared normal reach, various types of shared super reach, and various types of shared special reach are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired at the time of being stored, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the ordinary symbol is set by the ordinary symbol per random symbol table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the ordinary symbol When it agrees with the value of the random number which is set by the per random number table, it is determined that the symbol is normal. In addition, this normal symbol per random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol) and high probability of high probability of being hit of normal symbol from the low probability (of normal symbol) It is divided into two types, one for the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers for making a big hit included in each is set differently. Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 19 (c), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are 24 random values corresponding to the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 28”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24. Therefore, the probability of becoming a big symbol of a normal symbol is "1/10".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 obtains a normal symbol. Is displayed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random number values are stored in the random number per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability to become a big hit of a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2".

  If the ball passes through the second entry port 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 selects the normal symbol. Is displayed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as), and the first entrance 64 is opened “one second × twice”. Thus, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and furthermore, the first entrance 64 is released. Since the period becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entry port 64. In addition, a table (not shown) storing a random number value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit or not from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64 is opened only for “one second × 2 times” when the normal symbol comes into contact, but it is opened. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 3 times" may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). And is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 34).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to various counters shown in FIG. 18, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 34), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 17, the RAM 203 has a special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a special symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d, and a probability change flag The counter 203f has a round number counter 203g, a lottery flag 203h, an open flag 203i, and a rotating body flag 203j.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter C1. The respective values of the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 are acquired at the timing when the ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas Among the vacant areas of 1 area to 4 th reserved area), areas with smaller area numbers (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of a special symbol is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area Then, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, the determination such as the drawing of the special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins to the first entrance 64 (start winning), and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired according to the starting winning, the big hit lottery of the original special symbol In addition to the above, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the values of the acquired counters C1 to C3. Thus, before the lottery of the original special symbol is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) corresponding to the starting winning combination From now on, it is described that the prediction is made by prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. In addition, a pass / fail, stop classification, a fluctuation pattern etc. correspond as various information.

  Then, when the pre-reading is finished, a winning information command including various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained by the pre-reading is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information to save the winning information storage area of the RAM 233. Store in 223a.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), similarly to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance port 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, if you shift data from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area will be empty, so the prizes stored in the other reserved areas will be the same as in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. A shift process is performed to pack data into a reserve area with a small area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is a variation display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and 1 to the maximum value 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Are added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 26 and S405 in FIG. 28). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the holding ball of the variation display held on the main control device 110 by the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display controlled by the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if it deviates from that, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the number of balls command received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the game ball passing through the second ball entry port 67 (standby number Is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the game ball passes through the second entry hole 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases up to a maximum value of 4 1 Are added (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 29).

  When the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the second random number per hit The value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S705 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes either the left or right second entrance 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b. Not (S703 in FIG. 30: No).

  The probability change flag 203e is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol) of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203e is on, the probability change of the pachinko machine 10 is the special symbol It indicates that it is in the state, and if the probability change flag 203e is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol) of the special symbol. In this random variation flag 203e, the initial value is set to zero, and in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the big hit of the special symbol, the gaming ball has entered one of the definite variation ball entrances 502 to 504. Are turned on (S1614 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, the probability change flag 203e is turned off when the gaming ball enters the time saving ball entry port 501 in the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 (S1620 in FIG. 35).

  When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) is executed by the MPU 201, a lottery of special symbols is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the value of the probability variation flag 203e is referred to, and if the state is on, the lottery of the special symbol is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203e If is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability time.

  The time saving counter 203f is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol Indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol if the value of the time counter 203f is zero. At this time, the counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and a specific value based on the game ball winning to the short time winning opening 501 in the lottery by the lottery device 300 performed based on the big hit of the special symbol. (For example, 100) is set (see S1620 in FIG. 35). Thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time the variation effect of the special symbol is finished, until the value of the time counter 23f becomes 0 (S214 in FIG. 26).

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is to be made, the value of the time counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 1 or more, a lottery for an ordinary symbol based on a random symbol table for high probability time. On the other hand, if the value of the time-span-middle counter 203f is 0, the lottery for the regular symbol is conducted based on the random symbol per symbol table for low probability (see S610 and S611 in FIG. 29).

  The round number counter 203g is a counter indicating the number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the value of the round number counter 203g indicates the current number of rounds in the jackpot game. The round number counter 203g has its value set to 0 at the start of the big hit, and is incremented by 1 at the start of each round.

  The lottery flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not it is time to perform a lottery by the lottery apparatus 300, and is turned on when it is a time to perform a lottery. On the other hand, the lottery flag 203h is turned off after making various settings for starting the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300. That is, the lottery flag 203h is a flag that is turned on only after the lottery is actually started after it is determined that it is time to perform the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300.

  The release flag 203i is a flag indicating whether or not the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened. If the release flag 203i is on, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is opened, and if off, it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is closed. The release flag 203i is normally set to off, and is turned on after the release of the lottery gate 310 is set among the settings for performing the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 (S1603, S1604 in FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is detected and the lottery gate 310 is closed, it is turned off (S1608, S1609 in FIG. 35).

  The rotating body flag 203j is a flag indicating the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300, and the distribution rotation is performed when the position of the distribution rotating body 341 is shifted before and after the power is turned on. It is used to return the arrangement of the body 341 to the state before powering off. If the rotating body flag 203 j is on, it indicates that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, and if off, it indicates that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right. The rotating body flag 203 j is switched in conjunction with the arrangement of the distributed rotating body 341 by the position detection sensor 263, and the distributed rotating body 341 is deflected by the position detection sensor 263 in the left direction (backward state) If it is detected that there is, the rotating body flag is turned on, and it is turned off when it is detected that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right (the state of facing up).

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a The solenoid 209, which includes a large opening solenoid for opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving the motorized part, drives the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b in the lottery apparatus 300 to flow the game ball. A flow path solenoid 265 for switching the path is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply unit 115, and each ball entry port in the lottery apparatus 300. A winning sensor 420 for detecting entry of gaming balls, a position detection sensor 263 for detecting the orientation of the distribution rotary body 341 in the lottery apparatus 300, and a rotation motor 264 for correcting the orientation of the distribution rotary body 341 are connected, The MPU 201 performs various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208, the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253, an incoming ball signal output from the winning sensor 420, a detection signal of the position detection sensor 263, etc. Run.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as illumination parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  A fluctuation pattern table 222 a is stored in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a change start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d and a special effect flag 223e. ing.

  The variation pattern table 222a is a table used to determine the aspect of the variation pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, according to the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the rough fluctuation patterns such as "outside normal reach", "shared normal reach", and "shared special reach". The fluctuation pattern table 222a is used to determine the detailed aspect of the fluctuation pattern based on the aspect of the rough fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and the rough of the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command For each aspect, an aspect of a plurality of detailed variation patterns that can be selected is defined.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination when the start winning combination is achieved in the main control device 110. The main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the drawing of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the predicted various information is The main control unit 110 notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  Similar to the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control unit 110, the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts and holds the number of balls (waiting number) of the holding of the fluctuation effect held in the main control unit 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by entering the ball into first entrance 64, or the variation display in the special symbol is executed in main controller 110. When the number of holding balls is subtracted, a holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the holding ball number command. The symbol holding ball number counter 223b is stored (see S1407 in FIG. 40). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is used to display the number-of-held-ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of {circle over (1)}, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number for the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to display the symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol holding ball number counter 203 a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2701 in FIG. 41) and turned off when the setting of the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1702 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1404 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S1707 in FIG. 43). The stop type selection flag 223 d is also turned off when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The special effect flag 223e is such that the distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 swings to the left (see FIG. 11A), and the ball can enter the ball in the next lottery. In the case where the mouth becomes either the probability change ball inlet 503 or the probability ball inlet 504 (that is, the state in which it is determined to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol in the next lottery by the lottery apparatus 300) This is a flag for performing variation pattern presentation in a special mode different from normal. The special effect flag 223e is turned on when the loop state command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S3702 in FIG. 42) and is off when the normal state command output from the main control device 110 is received. (See S3704 in FIG. 42).

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Thus, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed after the boot process (see S1801 in FIG. 44) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of power on, and the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect when it is done.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S1803 and S1804 in FIG. 44).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 shows the power-on display on the third symbol display device 81 while the display control device 114 transfers image data to be stored from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after power-on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at the time of power on as shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 is shown in FIG. As shown in Fig. 21 (c), the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" on the display screen of the main image at power-on and at the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. The power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol is alternately displayed repeatedly during the fluctuation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and the image shown in FIG. 21 (b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the stoppage of the fluctuation effect when “big hit of special symbol”, and when “out of special symbol” is shown in FIG. 21 (c) The image to be shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 As described above, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 20, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) having the numerals "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is determined in advance.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects , And display data tables corresponding to demonstration effects are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to a round effect and a demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 14). "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (the address “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address Null data is defined to mean (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address in the transfer data table based on the display data table It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. 21A to 21C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 (see S1805 in FIG. 44). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 55 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2101 in FIG. 46B). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 46B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 46 (b) (see S2109) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 of FIG. 55A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Since resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 55 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) in which the contents of the instruction for image drawing for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later (see FIG. 24) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 for which the image drawing process of one frame is completed (FIG. 54)), pointer update processing (see FIG. 54) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one (see S3201 in FIG. 54).

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 24), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3007 in FIG. 52). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The update of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3513 in FIG. 56). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 56). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 47).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 46B) is performed (see S3602 of FIG. 57).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this embodiment, When 299, 99, 99, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and then, The start winning process associated with the winning on the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is executed (S105). In addition, the details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S106), and the through gate passes along with the passage of the ball at the second entrance port 67 A process is performed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding N of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S208). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When the special symbol variation start process is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. More specifically, according to the value of the first random number counter C1 it is determined whether or not the big win of the special symbol, and in the case of the big win of the special symbol, according to the value of the first type counter C2 Whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37 in the case of the big hit A, and the red LED is turned on in the case of the big hit B. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variable display under execution in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether it is a jackpot of a special symbol (S211). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S211: Yes), the lottery flag 203h is turned on (S212), and this processing is ended.

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is the deviation of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether the value of the time counter 203f is 1 or more (S213), and the value of the time counter 203f is 1 If it is above (S213: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S214), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a On the basis of the values of the various counters stored in the table, a lottery of “big hit of special symbol” or “out of special symbol” is made (decision determination), and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 It is a process for determining the production pattern (the fluctuation production pattern) of the fluctuation production to be done.

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is acquired To do (S301).

  Next, based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the first hit random number table 202a, a lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S302). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the random value stored in the first random number table 202a. As described above, the random number value of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 107, 282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time, and The random number value of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78 , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ". .

  Further, it can be determined by referring to the state of the probability variation flag 203e whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S302, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203e, and when these values match, special processing is performed. It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S302 that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S302: Yes), the display mode at the time of big hit is set based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 ( S303). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the big hit of the special symbol with two types (big hit Of A and jackpot B), it is determined which is the jackpot type. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (pre-root route jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot It is determined that it is B (back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

  In the process of S303, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type in the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol common to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S304). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S304, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. The relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is previously defined by a table or the like.

  For example, as variation patterns for outliers, various types such as "displacement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short duration)", "disappear normal reach", "disappear super reach", and "disappear special reach" As the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various "shared normal reach", various "shared super reach", various "shared special reach" are defined, and as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A, various "special reach" Are defined, and as the variation pattern of hit / out-of-common use, various common common reach, various common super reach, and common special reach are specified.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S302: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S305). In the process of S305, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a Based on this, as the type of stop to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a back and forth reach, a reach other than the back and forth, or a complete out.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is a definite variation state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. And set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. Do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete removal is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than out of order is set, "98 , 99 ”and set the reach before and after.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S306). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, as in the process of S304, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Decide.

  When the process of S304 or the process of S306 is finished, next, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S304 or the process of S306 is set (S307). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S303 or S305 is set (S308). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 24). Ru. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the processing of S308 is finished, the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c (number of holding times N of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  And if there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S401: No) or if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 If not (S403: No), the process ends and returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N) of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol holding ball number The value (N) of the counter 203c is incremented by 1 (S404). And the ball holding number command which shows the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c changed by calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the holding ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223 .

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the first of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Then, based on the various counter values stored in the process of S406, it predicts the success or failure of the lottery for the special symbol (whether or not it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of big hit), and its fluctuation pattern (S407). Here, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the process of S406, and the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 19A) It is determined by comparing one by one with the (hit value). As described above, the random number value of the special symbol at the time of low probability of the special symbol is three of "7, 107, 282" stored in the first random number table 202a for the low probability time, and The random number value of the special symbol at the time of high probability of the special symbol is stored in the first random number table 202a for high probability, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78 , 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ". .

  In addition, it is determined by referring to the probability variation flag 203e whether the present is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, if the probability change flag 203e is on, it is a high probability state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203e is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the process of S407, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number stored in the first random number table 202a according to the state of the probability change flag 203e, and when these values coincide, It determines that it is a jackpot of the symbol.

  And, when it is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, Of the two types of special symbol jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B), it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined that the jackpot A (the jackpot in the flow channel in the lottery apparatus 300 switches to the front route, the front route jackpot) If it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined that the jackpot B (the jackpot at which the flow path in the lottery apparatus 300 is switched to the back route, the back route jackpot) (see FIG. 19B).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out, the front and back out of reach reach as a stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406. It is determined whether it is a reach other than the back and forth deviation or the complete outlier. Here, if the probability change flag 203e is on, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the process of S406 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability time, Determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203e is off, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, to determine the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be completely out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", it is determined to be reach other than out of order If it is "98, 99", it is determined that the back and forth reach is reached.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. The fluctuation pattern in the third symbol display device 81 is, from a fluctuation pattern table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202, to a predicted lottery result or a predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) It will be selected accordingly. In the fluctuation pattern table, for example, as a fluctuation pattern for deviation, various kinds of "disappearing (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearing normal reach", "disappearing super reach" various, "disappearing special reach" "Various is specified as the variation pattern of jackpot A · jackpot B common, various" shared normal reach ", various" shared super reach ", various" shared special reach ", as the fluctuation pattern for jackpot A" special " Various types of reach are defined, and various types of shared normal reach, various types of shared super reach, and various types of shared special reach are defined as the variation patterns for hit and off. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, the fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type).

  If the process of S407 predicts the lottery success or failure in the special symbol, the stop type (in the case of a big hit, the jackpot type), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery success or failure, the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S408), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25).

  The winning information information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201, It is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the pass / fail, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the prize information command, and stores the information in the prize information storage area 223a as prize information.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the first ball entrance 64. It is a process for controlling the open time of the motorized part and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory attached to the first ball entrance 64 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-span-medium counter 203f of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S608). The hour-time counter 203f is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-shortening counter 203f is 1 or more, the time-saving state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203f is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol.

  If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so the motorized prize associated with the first entrance 64 is opened. This is for the purpose of suppressing the entry of the ball intended to be won by the special winning opening 65a into the first ball entry port 64 as much as possible. In addition, since the special winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first ball entrance 64, even if the ball is suppressed from entering the first ball entrance 64 in the big hit of the special symbol, the first Many balls enter the ball entrance 64. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of holding balls for the first ball inlet 64 is maximum (four times).

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number per symbol table for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 19 (c)).

  In the process of S608, when the value of the time saving / middle counter 203f is 0 (S608: No), the process proceeds to the process of S611. In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607, Based on the symbol random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the symbol is hit normally is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol per random symbol table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that the symbol is off normally (see FIG. 19 (c)).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is the hit of the normal symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S612: Yes) The display mode of the hit time is set (S613). In the process of S 613, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is judged whether the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614). If the value of the hour / minute counter 203f is 1 or more (S614: Yes), the present is a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In this embodiment, in order to suppress the ball from entering the first entrance 64 as much as possible during the jackpot of the special symbol, even when the normal symbol is hit, it is the same as when the normal symbol is detached. The number of times of opening of the motorized part and the opening time thereof are set.

  In the process of S615, if it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S615: No), since the pachinko machine 10 is not in the jackpot of the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the first entry ball opening The opening period of the motorized accessory attached to 64 is set to one second, and the number of times of opening is set to two (S616), and the process proceeds to the processing of S619. In the process of S614, when the value of the time saving / storing counter 203f is 0 (S614: No), the process proceeds to the process of S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the ordinary symbol, the open period of the motorized accessory accompanying the first ball inlet 64 is 0 The setting is made for 2 seconds, and the number of times of release is set to 1 (S617), and the processing shifts to the processing of S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the symbol is normally out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619), and if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 1 or more (S619: Yes), the fluctuation in the second symbol display device 83 The variation time of the display is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / hour counter 203f is 0 (S619: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the big hit of the special symbol, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, compared with the time of low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the first ball entrance 64 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the first ball entrance 64.

  In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S622). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S620 or the processing of S621.

  In the process of S 622, when the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S 622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "o" symbol as the second symbol stops at the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S 618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the second symbol display updating process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is performed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. The process is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S613 or the process of S618.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S624). If the lottery result this time is a normal symbol hit (S 624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electrically driven combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is set (S 625), and this processing is ended. When the opening / closing control start of the motorized combination is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing control of the electrically operated combination is executed when the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized part is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or S617 end. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S624 that the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). The through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second entrance 67, and if the ball has passed, This is processing for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the second ball entrance 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the second entry hole 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d (number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is obtained (S702) . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed the second entrance ball opening 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed the second entrance ball opening 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the second ball entrance 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number The value (M) of the counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 This process is ended by storing in the area of (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 32, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S913. As described later in the process of S1014 in FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmission of the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 914, S 915) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S914, S915), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S 907: Yes, while keeping the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S 908). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery is transmitted to restore the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of the drive power supply cutoff (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 33, in the rotating body position initialization process of S910 (see FIG. 33), the position of the distributing rotating body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 is determined as necessary. And correct. After completion of the rotating body position initialization process (S310), the process shifts to the process of S911, transmits a rendering permission command to the audio lamp control device 113, and performs various operations on the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. The execution of the effect is permitted (S911). Then, the interruption is permitted (S912), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the rotating body position initialization process (S910) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position initialization process (S910).

  As described above, the rotating body position initialization process (S 910) is a process of correcting the position of the distribution rotating body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 as necessary. The case where the correction is necessary is, for example, a case where the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 has been changed between the time the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and the next time the power is turned on. The possible arrangements of the distribution rotating body 341 are the arrangement in the state of swinging to the right (the state of the front) (see FIG. 11B) and the arrangement of the state of swinging to the left (the state of the back) (FIG. 11). (A) see). The state of swinging to the right (face-up state) is when initialization is performed (that is, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on), or the game ball Is a case where it passes through the induction | lighting path 408c provided in the distribution rotary body 341 (refer FIG. 14). On the other hand, the state of swinging to the left (in the reverse direction) is when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408b provided in the distribution rotating body 341 (see FIG. 13).

  In the rotating body position initialization process (S910), first, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is on (S1501), and it is determined that it is on (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to S1502. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1501 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (ie, is off), it is further determined whether the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503). If it is determined not (i.e., off), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In the process of S1502, the rotary motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotating body 341 is driven to arrange the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right (the state of facing up) (see FIG. 11B). The processing is rotated about the shaft 406 so as to be (S1504), and the processing ends and the processing returns to the start-up processing.

  In the process of S1503, when it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S1503: Yes), the state of the distribution rotating body 341 before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off swings to the left (back side) State), so that the rotation motor 264 for rotating the distribution rotation body 341 is driven to swing the distribution rotation body 341 to the left (a state in the reverse direction) (Refer to FIG. 11A), and the process ends and returns to the start-up process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating process of S1012 and S1013 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. In addition, it transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 the ball holding ball number command and the prize information command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28). Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, it transmits the number-of-rounds command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  After updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 is opened or closed. A lottery gate process is executed (S1004). In the lottery gate process (S1004), after the stop symbol of the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the occurrence of the big hit is indicated (that is, the lottery of whether or not to make the special symbol high probability state At the timing performed by the lottery apparatus 300), the lottery gate 310 is opened. Further, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate or it is detected that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed, the lottery gate 310 is closed. Furthermore, in this processing, it is detected which gaming ball entered the lottery gate 310 into any of the ball entry ports among the time-saving ball entry port 501 and the probability changing ball entry 502-504, and the gaming ball is Perform processing according to the entered ball entrance. In the present embodiment, the lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the lottery gate processing (S1004) is finished, the jackpot control for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 or execution of the jackpot effect when the jackpot of the special symbol The process is executed (S1005). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a specified number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1005) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, rotational body position detection processing is performed to determine the arrangement of the distribution rotary body 341 disposed inside the lottery apparatus 300 based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 (S1006). In the present embodiment, the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is performed in the main process, but may be performed in the timer interrupt process.

  When the rotating body position detection process (S1006) is finished, the motor-operated article opening / closing process is executed to perform the opening / closing control of the electric vehicle associated with the first ball entrance 64 (S1007). In the electric part opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric part is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 29), the opening / closing control of the electric part is started. In addition, the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S616 or the process of S617 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the first symbol display displays the variation display according to the variation pattern Start at device 37. In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S304 or the process of S306 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends. The variation display being executed at 37 is ended, and the stop symbol (the first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S303 or the processing of S305 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 27). The stop display (lighting display) is performed on the device 37.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the variation display is performed in the second symbol display device 83 Start. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 29), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 29), the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83. (Lights up)

  After that, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1011) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process of this time (S1011: No), during the time to the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time to the execution timing of the next main process (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1012, S1013).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1012). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1010, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power supply is off, As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1014 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1014), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113) And transmit (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1016), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1010 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the change in gaming state performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can start from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be alleviated, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the lottery gate process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the lottery gate processing (S1004). This lottery gate process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and controls the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 for lottery whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or This is a process for detecting a ball entry port where the gaming ball having entered the lottery gate 310 enters the ball.

  In the lottery gate process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery flag 203h is on. If it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is on (S1601: Yes), it indicates that it is time to start the lottery whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery device 300 performs the lottery Various settings for setting are made (S1602 to S1604), the lottery flag 203h is turned off (S1605), and this processing is ended.

  In the various settings for performing the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300, first, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the jackpot type (S1602). Specifically, if the big hit type is "big hit A", the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is set to the near route, and if the big hit type is "big hit B", the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is back Set as root. When the process of S1602 ends, the game ball can enter the interior of the lottery apparatus 300 by setting the opening of the lottery gate 310 (S1603). Thereafter, the release flag 203i is turned on to indicate that the lottery gate 310 is opened (S1604), and various settings are ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery flag 203h is not on (that is, off) as a result of the process of S1601 (S1601: No), it is determined whether the release flag 203i is on or not, and the release flag 203i is If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S1606: No), the process of S1607 to S1612 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the release flag 203i is on (S1606: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is opened, so it is determined whether the gaming ball has entered the lottery gate 310 or not. (S1607).

  In the process of S1607, when it is determined that the gaming ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: Yes), the gaming ball necessary for performing the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 has entered the lottery apparatus 300 In order to prevent the game ball from entering the lottery apparatus 300 thereafter, the lottery gate 310 is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process shifts to the process of S1613. .

  If it is determined in the process of S1607 that the gaming ball has not entered the lottery gate 310 (S1607: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S1610). Here, the condition for closing the lottery gate 310 in a state where the gaming ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 is that the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 has elapsed. When it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (that is, within the maximum opening time of the lottery gate 310) (S1610: No), the process proceeds to S1613. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the drawing gate 310 is satisfied (that is, the maximum opening time of the drawing gate 310 has passed) (S1610: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned off, and the hour reduction counter 203f is selected. Set 100 (S1611), and set the time jackpot game (S1612). Then, the lottery gate is closed (S1608), the open flag 203i is turned off (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1613.

  In the process of S1613, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered one of the entrances of the probability change ball entrances 502 to 504 based on the detection results of the winning sensors 420a to 420d (S1613). If it is determined that the ball has entered any of the definite change ball entrances 502 to 504 (S1613: Yes), the definite change flag 203e is turned on (S1614), and the start of the definite change jackpot game is set (S1615). Then, it is determined whether or not the ball entrance into which the gaming ball has entered is the definite insertion ball opening 503 (S1616), and if it is determined that the ball entry is the definite insertion ball opening 503 (S1616: Yes), voice lamp control A normal state command is set as a command to be transmitted to the apparatus 113 (S1618), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1616, if it is determined that the ball entry ball into which the gaming ball has entered is not the probability change ball entry 503 (ie, the probability change ball entry 502 or the probability change ball entry 504) (S1616: No), a loop status command is set as a command to be sent to the audio lamp control device 113 (S1617), and this processing ends.

  Here, the normal state command and the loop state command will be described in detail. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming ball enters the ball entry ball slot 503, the sorting rotor 341 swings to the right based on the game ball passing through the guiding passage 408c ( See Figure 14). When the distribution rotary body 341 is swung to the right, in the next lottery by the lottery apparatus 300, the gaming ball is a ball entry port disposed on the right side of the lottery apparatus 300, or a time entry ball opening 501 or a probability change In order to enter one of the ball openings 502 (see FIG. 16 (a)), after the end of the next jackpot, it does not necessarily shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, and the gaming ball enters the time-saving ball If you enter the mouth 501, it will transition to a special symbol low probability state.

  On the other hand, when the gaming ball enters the probability change ball entrance 502 or the probability change ball entrance 504, the sort rotating body 341 swings to the left (see FIGS. 13 and 15), so the lottery apparatus 300 In the lottery for the next big hit by the game, the ball entrance to which the game balls are distributed is the probability change ball entrance 503 which is the ball entrance provided on the left side of the lottery apparatus 300 or the probability change ball entrance 504 (Refer to FIG. 16 (b)), it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol even after the next jackpot. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to enter the definite change ball opening 502 or the definite change ball entry 504 as compared to the game ball entering the definite change ball slot 503.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball enters the definite insertion ball opening 502 or the definite insertion ball opening 504 (S1616: No), the voice lamp control device 113 is in a loop state which is an advantageous state for the player. It is configured to transmit a command (loop state command) indicating that the transition has been made. Then, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 41, the sound lamp control device 113 displays an indication that the player is currently in an advantageous state based on the reception of the loop state command. The effect (loop state effect) is configured to be executable. Therefore, since the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous by generating the loop state effect which is an effect different from the normal state, the loop state which is advantageous for the player In spite of being in the middle, it is possible to suppress leaving the game without noticing the advantageous state.

  On the other hand, when it is detected that the ball has entered the ball socket 503 (S1616: Yes), the sound lamp control device 113 indicates the normal state indicating that the current state is not the loop state (ie, the normal state). It is configured to send a command. The audio lamp control device 113 can determine whether to perform the loop state effect based on which of the normal state command and the loop state command is received.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1613, if it is determined that the gaming ball has not entered into any of the ball entry ball slots 502 to 504 (S1613: No), whether or not the gaming ball has entered the time-saving ball entry 501 Is determined based on the detection result of the winning sensor 420c (S1619), and when it is determined that the short time ball entry port 501 is not entered (S1619: No), this processing ends and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1619 that the gaming ball has entered the short time entry ball entrance 501, it shifts to a low probability state of a special symbol after a big hit, so the probability change flag 203e is turned off and the time counter s 203f Is set to 100 (S1620), and the start of the time jackpot game is set (S1621). Then, as a command to be output to the audio lamp control device 113, a normal state command for notifying that the current state is not in the loop state (that is, in the normal state) is set (S1622), and this processing is ended.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1005). This jackpot control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, a specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the process of S1612, S1615 or S1621 of the lottery gate process (see FIG. 35) is executed and the start of the big symbol of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the big symbol of the special symbol is started Do. When the jackpot of the special symbol is started in the process of S1101 (S1101: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 (S1102), and the present process is ended. The number of rounds during the big hit is determined by the round number counter 203g.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1103 (S1103: No), the present process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1103, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (1103: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1106). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is output in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After setting the number-of-rounds command, the number of rounds to be newly started matches the number of rounds counter 203g by adding 1 to the value of the number-of-rounds counter 203g (S1107), and this processing ends Do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1104, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1108: No), the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1109), and the round number counter 203g It is determined whether the value is 8 (S1110). If it is determined in the process of S1110 that the value of the round number counter is not 8 (that is, one of 1 to 7) (S1110: No), this process ends and returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S1110: Yes), the end timing of the eight rounds (that is, the last round) is set, so the end of the jackpot is set (S1111). End the process and return to the main process.

  Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 37, a rotating body position detection process (S1006) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this rotating body position detection process (S1006). The rotational body position detection process (S1006) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 34), and the arrangement of the distribution rotational body 341 is stored in the rotational body flag 203j, and the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. This is also a process for enabling distribution of the rotating body 341 to be returned to the same position as that immediately before the power is turned off at the time of power recovery.

  In this rotating body position detection process (S1006), first, it is determined whether or not the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501). When it is determined that the rotating body flag 203j is not on (that is, off) as a result of the process of S2501 (S2501: No), the arrangement of the allocation rotating bodies 341 in the previous rotating body position detection process is facing up ( Since it indicates that the arrangement is a state of swinging to the right), based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, whether or not the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (a state of swinging to the right) It is determined whether or not the arrangement of the rotating body 341 has been changed between the previous rotating body position detection process and the current rotating body position detection process (S2502).

  When it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (the state of swinging to the right) (S2502: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing. Since there is no change from the above, this processing ends and returns to the main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the reverse direction (the state of swinging to the left) (S2502: No), the distribution rotating body 341 is distributed from the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing. Since it indicates that the arrangement has changed, the rotating body flag 203 j is turned on (S 2503), and this processing is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S2501 that the rotating body flag 203j is on (S2501: Yes), the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is facing up based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263 (right When it is determined whether or not the state is the swinging state) (S2504), and it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the reverse direction (the state of swinging to the left) (S2504: No), distribution Since the arrangement of the rotating body 341 has not changed from the time of the previous rotating body position detection process, the process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the face-up state (the state of swinging to the right) (S2504: Yes), the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 from the time of the previous rotating body position detection processing Indicates that it has changed, so the rotating body flag 203j is turned off (S2505), and this processing ends.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 38, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1316 (see FIG. 39) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”). It is determined whether or not it has been started during the execution of step S1202). As described later with reference to FIG. 39, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1313 in FIG. 39), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S1316. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1316 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1316 It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1316 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1316, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1206). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1208, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1316 is executed (see S1315 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S1316 is performed, the process of S1208 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current startup processing is instantaneous This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process of S1316 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1209), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210). The permission is set (S1211), and the processing shifts to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1208 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1204 to S1206 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, and an initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1211), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1209 is that when the process of S1208 is reached via the processes of S1204 to S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1204. If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current processing of S1301 has been executed (S1301), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1311 without performing the process of S1302 to S1310. In the process of S1301, the process of determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed is mainly a process relating to display (effect) in S1302 to S1310, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms) This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1311 and the variable display setting process of S1312 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1311 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1312 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1312 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S1302) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to become the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1308 described later (S1303), and then the power on notification process is executed (S1304). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1305 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, a frame button input monitoring and rendering process is executed (S1307). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1307 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and the process shifts to the process of S1311. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output processing of S1309 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1311, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S1311). The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the command determination process (S1311) ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S1312). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1312 is finished, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1313). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1315), and the power-off process is executed (S1316). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1317), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1313 (S1313: No), it is determined based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1314: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1314: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the command determination process (S1311) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1311). This command determination process (S1311) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether it has been done (S1401). If a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S1401: Yes), fluctuation pattern selection processing for selecting the aspect of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command is executed (S1402), and the processing returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type selected here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. And it is used in order to set the fluctuation pattern command for indication which notifies the start of fluctuation production and the fluctuation pattern classification to display control 114.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is next determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1403). When the stop type command is received (S1403: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1404), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1405). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when a variable display setting process (see FIG. 43) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, when the stop type command has not been received (S1403: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1406). And when the holding ball number command is received (S1406: Yes), the value included in the received holding ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (special symbol The number of times of suspension N of the variable display in is extracted, and this is stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1407). Further, in the process of S1407, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1407 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, since the number of holding balls command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins at the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) or when the drawing of the special symbol is performed, the starting winning combination is performed. Every time a special symbol is drawn, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 by the process of S1407 is the special symbol holding ball number counter of the main control device 110 It can be adjusted to the value of 203c. Therefore, even if the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc. At the time of lottery of symbols, the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. In addition, if the process of S1407 is performed, the holding ball number command for a display for notifying the value of the updated special symbol holding ball number counter 223b to the display control apparatus 114 will be set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1406, if the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S1406: No), it is next determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1408). Then, when a winning information command is received (S1408: Yes), various information (pass or fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1409). When the process of S1409 is finished, next, the winning information (approval, stop type, fluctuation pattern) extracted in the process of S1409 is the first of the vacant areas (first to fourth areas) of the winning information storage area 223a. It stores in the area (S1410) and returns to the main processing.

  In the process of S1408, when the prize information command has not been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether the round number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1411). Then, when the round number command is received (S1411: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1412), and the display round number command according to the extracted round number is set ( S1413), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1302) of the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1411, when the round number command is not received (S1413: No), next, the special effect setting process of determining whether the current state is the loop state is executed (S1414) . Based on the determination result by the special effect execution process, it is determined whether or not a special effect is suggested to suggest a loop state that is advantageous to the player.

  When the process of S1414 is completed, it is then determined whether or not another command has been received, a process according to the received result is executed, and the process is ended (S1419). For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the variation pattern selection process (S1402) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process (S1402). The variation pattern selection process (S1402) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1402 in FIG. 40), as described above. It is the processing for selecting the classification of the change pattern performed in the 3rd symbol display 81 based on the change pattern command from.

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1402), first, the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2701), and then it is determined whether the special effect flag 223e is on (S2702).

  Then, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is on, the fluctuation pattern type for the loop state is extracted from the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 (S2703) , End this process. In the process of S2703, in addition to the variation pattern types selected in the normal state, it is also possible to select variation pattern types that are not selected in the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the player is in a special state by selecting the variation pattern effect of the aspect dedicated to the loop state different from the normal state and displaying it on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, with the aspect for exclusive use of the loop state, for example, characters that do not appear in the normal state appear during fluctuation of the third symbol, a symbol different from the normal state is displayed, or a sound effect different from the normal state Audio production is to be performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S2702: No), the normal state among the fluctuation pattern types based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110 The variation pattern type for the target is extracted (S2704), and this processing ends. Based on the variation pattern type extracted in the process of S2703 or S2704, the variation pattern effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the loop state is currently based on the state of the special effect flag 203e, and if it is determined that the loop state is It is possible to select the aspect of the fluctuation pattern rendition to indicate that the present state is advantageous. Therefore, since the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous by executing the fluctuation pattern effect in an unusual mode, the loop state which is advantageous for the player In spite of being in the middle, it is possible to suppress leaving the game without noticing the advantageous state.

  In the loop state, the variation pattern type selected in the normal state may not be selected at all. As a result, the player can judge whether or not the current loop state is in the loop state by performing the variation pattern effect only once, so that the loop state is in spite of being in the loop state. It is possible to more reliably suppress leaving the game without noticing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special effect setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special effect setting process (S1414). This special effect setting process (S1414) is executed in the command determination process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 (see S1414 in FIG. 40), and as described above, the current state is It is a process for determining whether or not it is in the loop state, and for performing the fluctuation pattern effect in the effect mode according to whether or not it is in the loop state.

  In the special effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a loop status command has been received (S3701). The loop status command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game ball having entered either the probability change ball entrance 502 or the probability change ball entrance 504 in the above-mentioned lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). It is a command to be output, and is a command indicating transition to a loop state where transition to a high probability state of a special symbol is made not only after the current jackpot but also after the next jackpot.

  If it is determined that a loop state command has been received (S3701: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned on to indicate that the current state is a loop state (S3702), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the loop status command is not received (S3701: No), it is then determined whether the normal status command is received (S3703). The normal state command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 based on the game ball having entered either the short time ball entry 501 or the probability change ball entry 503 in the above-described lottery gate processing (see FIG. 35). It is a command to be output, and is a command indicating that it has transitioned to a normal state that may transition to any of the special symbol high probability state and the special symbol low probability state after the next jackpot. .

  If it is determined that the normal state command has been received (S3703: Yes), the special effect flag 223e is turned off to indicate that the current state is not in the loop state (S3704), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3703 that the normal state command has not been received (S3703: No), this process is ended as it is.

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41), the state of the special effect flag 223e set in this process is determined, and the variation pattern is executed in a special mode for the loop state or It is determined whether to execute the variation pattern in an aspect. As a result, during the loop state, the fluctuation pattern effect is executed in a mode different from normal, so that the player can easily recognize that the current state is the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from quitting the game without noticing that the current state is in the loop state but not in the loop state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variable display setting process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S1312). This variation display setting process (S1312) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S1706. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1702), and then the process of S2703 or S2704 in the fluctuation pattern selection process (see FIG. 41). In step S1, the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the fluctuation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1703).

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1704). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1705). In the process of S1705, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1706.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1706). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S1706: No), since the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, this fluctuation display End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1706: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1707), and then in the process of S1405 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40) The stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1708).

  Next, the extracted stop type is set as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1709), and the display stop for notifying the display control device 114 based on the set stop type. A type command is generated, and set to transmit the command to the display control device 114 (S1710), and this processing ends. The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 57. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S1801), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S1801) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S1801) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S1901). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S1902). Thus, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S1901.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S1902, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S1902, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs and fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S1903). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after the other processing necessary for the boot processing is executed (S1904), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after this boot processing (see S1801 in FIG. 44) ends. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S1802 in FIG. 44) (S1905), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S1801) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 45, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S1902. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S1901 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S1901. After repeating the process including the process of S1902 a plurality of times, the processes of S1903 to S1905 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S1903 to S1905 without performing the processes of S1901 and S1902. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S1802). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S1803). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S1803, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S1804). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the processing of S1804, the simplified image display flag 233c is then performed. Is turned on (S1805). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 55A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed so as to transfer (see S3302 of FIG. 55A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, a simple command is made so that the power-on image (the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on) shown in FIG. 21 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B). A determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46 (b)) and a simplified display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46 (b)) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. 21 (b) and 21 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation presentation period, Simple change effects can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so that the transfer takes time, and the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on after the power is turned on is also long. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S1805, the interrupt permission is set (S1806), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the processing of S1806, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2001), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption processing, as shown in FIG. 46 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2101: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed, so it is not the power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2102) is performed, and then a display setting process (S2103) is performed.

  In the command determination process (S2102), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51.

  In the display setting process (S2103), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2102) or the like, an image of one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S2104). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S2103) or the simple display setting processing (S2109) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2105). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2106). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S2104), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2105) The drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2107, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (large jack A, big jack B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) indicated by the display stop type command The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2101 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2101: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21 on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S2108) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S2109) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2102) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 47, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2201: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2103) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2202). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2204), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2204: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S2205), the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2205) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233 d is set (S 2301).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2301, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2301 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2302). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2301 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2303). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2303. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2301, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2304), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S 2305). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S2306), the variation pattern command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S2305, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2301. , And at the same time the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81 while extracting the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing of S2302. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2304, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2204 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2204: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2206), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), a stop type command process is executed (S2207), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2207) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (any of big hit, reach back, reach other than back and forth, complete out) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2401) The fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by comparing the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 46B) is executed. A stop symbol after presentation is finally set (S2402).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It sets to OFF (S2403) and this processing is ended.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2402 is described. In the above-described task processing (S2104), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2402 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2403 and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2401, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the process of S2402.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2206 that there is no display stop type command (S2206: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2208), If there is a display round number command (S2208: Yes), the round number command processing is executed (S2209), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S2209) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233 d is set (S 2601). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2601, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2603), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2604). Then, the demonstration display flag and the determination display flag are both set to OFF (S2605), the fanfare command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When it is determined in the process of S2208 that there is no display round number command (S2208: No), next, it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2210), If there is an image change command (S2210: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S2211), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 51A, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2211) will be described. FIG. 51 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear surface image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear surface image change command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S3303) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S2801) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2802), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S2801 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2802. . Then, a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the image data corresponding to the back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing (S2104), when it is defined that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set in S2802 Then, the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified along with the passage of time, and the RAM address of the normal video RAM 236 corresponding to the back image is specified. Do.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2210 that there is no rear image change command (S2210: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S2212). For example (S2212: Yes), an error command process is executed (S2213), and the process returns to S2201.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S2213) will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (b). FIG. 51 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. The error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S2901). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S 2902), and the error command is The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2901, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S2902, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S2902, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2212 that there is no error command (S2212: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2219), and the process returns to the process of S2201.

  In the process of S2201 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2201: Yes ), The processing of S2202 to S2219 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2201 to S2219 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2201 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

  In the simplified command determination process (S2109) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 21, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 48) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 49), which are processes corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. Perform processing to discard without executing processing corresponding to.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 48) executed in this case, in the processing of S2301, a display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on fluctuation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d. In addition, since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image required in that case are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. In the process of S2302, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and a process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2103) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 52, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3001), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S3001: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S3002 to S3004 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3005. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3001: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S3002). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S3003, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S3003). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S3003: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3004).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3101).

  In task processing (S2104), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Decide various parameters necessary for drawing.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3101, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3102), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3004), or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S3003 (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3005.

  In S3005, pointer update processing is executed (S3005). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 3201). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233 f is updated by the process of S 3201, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233 f after the update is End information Is determined (S3202). As a result, if it is the End information (S3202: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3203). If it is a demonstration display data table (S3203: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3204), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S3205), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3203 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S3203: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S3206), the present process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S3202: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 52, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3006). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3006 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S3007), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S3008). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3008: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3008: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S3009).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S3009: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3010), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3011). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3012), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3013). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S3014), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S3015) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3015 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S2104), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S3015, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3009, if the finalized display flag is on (S3009: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S3016). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S3016: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 3017), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 3018). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3019). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3020), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S3021), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S3016, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3016: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simple display setting process (S2109) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 46B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over. A process of setting, in the display data table buffer 233d, a display data table which specifies to stop and display the image (FIG. 21 (b) or (c)) is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2105) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3302) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S3301, that is, if it is off (S3301: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3303), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S3302), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 55 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3302).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S3401), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3401: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction is completed (S3402). In this processing of S3402, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer processing is completed when the transfer completion signal indicating the end of the transfer processing is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S3402 (S3402: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3402: Yes), the process proceeds to S3403. Further, as a result of the process of S3401, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3401: No), the process proceeds to S3403.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3403), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3403: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3404), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S3403, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S3403: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3405), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thereby, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 46B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2108 in FIG. 46B) and the simple display setting process (see S2109 in FIG. 46B). Since determination processing (see FIGS. 47 to 51) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 52 to 54) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 56) (see S3301: No in FIG. 55A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 displays image data of frequently displayed images such as the third symbol, character symbol, and error message, and the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, the display controller 114, etc. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the decision is made, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, the third operation is performed from various operations performed by the player at any timing. It is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a normal image transfer setting process (S3303) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2105) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3303).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3005) of the display setting process (S2103) executed earlier The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3501). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S3502), and if it is transfer data information (S3502: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3503, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 to indicate that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S3505.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S3502 (S3502: No), the process of S3503 and S3504 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3505. In the process of S3505, it is determined whether or not an image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the last transfer of image data is completed (S3505), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S3505: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3506).

  In the process of S3506, after setting the transfer instruction of the image data to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3506 (S3506: No), since the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S3506: Yes), the process proceeds to S3507. Also, as a result of the process of S3505, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3505: No), the process proceeds to S3507.

  In the process of S3507, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3507). If the transfer start flag is on (S3507: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S3508), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3503 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3513. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3507: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S3509). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3509: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3509: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S3510), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S3511). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3512), and the process proceeds to S3513.

  In the process of S3513, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3513). The determination in the process of S3513 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233j. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233j, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S 3513 (S 3513: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3513 (S3513: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3514). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3514, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3515), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  In this manner, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the rear surface is changed. Image data used in an image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2106) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2104) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) From the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3601). That is, in the process of S3601, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2104), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2105), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3602). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3602, the drawing object buffer flag 233k is updated (S3603). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233 k is updated by inverting the value, that is, setting it to “1” when the value is “0”, and “0” if it is “1” To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 46B) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  As described above, in the present pachinko machine 10, after the stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is determined and determined as the "big hit of the special symbol", the lottery device 300 makes a special hit after the big hit. A lottery is performed to determine whether to shift to the high probability state of the symbol. In this lottery, any of the plurality of ball entrances (time-shorting ball entrance 501 and probability change ball entrance 502-504) in which the gaming balls entered the lottery apparatus 300 are disposed in the lottery apparatus 300 Whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol is determined based on whether to enter the ball mouth. Further, in the lottery apparatus 300, channel switching valves 331a and 331b for controlling the traveling direction of the game ball entered into the lottery apparatus 300, and the distributing rotary body 341 are disposed, and the game is performed according to these states. The ball entrance to which the ball enters is determined.

  The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is determined according to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B), and when the big hit type is big hit A, the game balls are distributed and run down to the near side of the rotating body 341 It switches to the direction (see FIG. 9 (b)). On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the game balls are switched to the direction in which the game balls flow down to the back side of the rotating body 341 (see FIG. 9A). Further, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is switched according to which one of the four guiding paths 408 a to 408 d provided in the distribution rotating body 341 passes the gaming ball.

  Specifically, when the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408 a in a state where the distributing rotating body 341 swings to the right (that is, a state where the guiding passages 408 a and 408 b come directly below the entrance 411), the distributing rotating body The game ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501 without changing the state of 341 (ie, the state of swinging to the right). Therefore, even when the player wins a jackpot next time, the distribution rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the right, and if the game ball is distributed again to the guiding passage 408a, the low probability state of the special symbol will be continuously reached. There is a case.

  In addition, when the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408b in a state where the distribution rotary body 341 swings to the right, the distribution rotary body 341 rotates leftward centering on the shaft 406 based on the weight of the game ball and the game ball Enters the ball socket 502 with probability change. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot next time, the game ball reaches the rotating body 341 with the distributing rotating body 341 swinging to the left (that is, the state in which the guiding paths 408c and 408d are directly below the entrance 411). In the next time, the ball will enter either the definite change ball entrance 503 or the definite change ball entrance 504. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the induction passage 408b, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit always ends in the next big hit It is

  On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the guiding passage 408c in a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left (that is, a state in which the guiding passage 408c, 408d comes directly below the entrance 411), Based on the rotation of the distributing rotary body 341 about the axis 406 in the right direction, the gaming ball enters the ball entry ball slot 503. Therefore, when the player wins a jackpot next time, the game ball reaches the rotating body 341 with the distributing rotating body 341 swinging to the right (that is, the state in which the guiding paths 408a and 408b come directly below the entrance 411). Since it will be different, next time, it will enter the ball into either one of the time-shortened ball entrance 501 or the probability change ball entrance 502. That is, after the big hit of this time, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, but in the next big hit, the possibility to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the big hit also becomes the low probability state of the special symbol. There is also a possibility of transition.

  Furthermore, when the game ball passes through the guiding path 408d with the distribution rotary body 341 swinging to the left side, the state of the distribution rotary body 341 remains unchanged (that is, remains swinging to the left side). Enters the ball socket 504 with probability change. Therefore, even when the player wins a jackpot next time, the sort rotating body 341 remains in the state of swinging to the left, so next time, enter the ball to either the definite change ball entrance 503 or the positive change ball entry 504 It becomes. That is, when the gaming ball passes through the guidance passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit always ends in the next big hit It is

  As described above, if the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left, the player is transferred to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit regardless of which of the guiding paths 408c and 408d the game ball passes through, so the player Can recognize that the result of the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 will be the high probability state of the special symbol simply by confirming that the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, and the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 The situation of can be confirmed with confidence.

  On the other hand, when the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, so the lottery result by the drawing device 300 is changed to the high probability state of the special symbol. And both anticipation for the transition and a sense of anxiety for the transition to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  Therefore, the orientation of the distribution rotary body 341 is confirmed, and if it is swinging to the left, it gives a sense of security to the player, and if it is swinging to the right, it gives the player a sense of expectation and anxiety. Therefore, it is possible to play a game with sharpening.

  Furthermore, if the gaming balls are distributed to the induction passage 408b or the induction passage 408d, not only the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. Since the game is finalized, the player is secured with three jackpots that will be won in the high probability state of the special symbol that shifts after the present jackpot, the next jackpot, and the next jackpot. As a result, it is possible to recognize the situation, to give the player a great sense of satisfaction, and to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit. That is, since the player is continuously elected to the high probability state of the special symbol, it becomes a very advantageous state for the player. And, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to suggest the player that it is in an advantageous state, it is possible to select a variation pattern effect in a mode different from normal. Therefore, since the player can easily recognize that the current state is advantageous by executing the fluctuation pattern effect in an unusual mode, the loop state which is advantageous for the player In spite of being in the middle, it is possible to suppress leaving the game without noticing the advantageous state.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery apparatus 300 is disposed in the right direction in a front view with respect to the variable display unit 80, but the present invention is not limited to this position, and the game ball can enter the lottery gate 310. It may be disposed at any position as long as it has a proper position. Further, although the gate for drawing is constituted by a lid-like gate as shown in FIG. 6, it may be replaced by a gate for opening and closing in the form of shutter.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to switch to the state of swinging to the right or to the state of swinging to the left according to the guiding passage through which the sorting ball passes, In the next lottery of the game ball entering the ball, the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously by making it possible to enter the ball only into the probability change ball entrance 503 or the probability change ball entrance 504 Although the winning is made twice or more, it may be realized in a controlled manner.

  For example, the first hit type selection table 202b was won in the first hit type first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit (when the jackpot was won in the low probability state of the special symbol) and the high probability state of the special symbol It may be configured to provide a first loop type for per-type selection table 202b2 for the case. In this case, the first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first hit is transferred to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the next lottery, the jackpot for which the first hit type selection table 202b2 for loop status is used and the special symbol The jackpot to transition to the low probability state is defined, while the first contact type selection table for the loop state 202b2 is transferred to the high probability state of the special symbol, but the first hit for the next lottery The first hit type selection table 202b1 for the first use and the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol transition to the high probability state of the special symbol, it defines the large hit that the first hit type selection table 202b2 for the loop state is used for the next lottery Just do it.

  In this embodiment, the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is executed before the jackpot game is started, but the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 may be executed during the jackpot game. For example, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 may be opened in the first round.

  In this case, a winning ball may be provided to the player each time one game ball is detected by the discharge ball detection sensor 422 of the lottery apparatus 300. Then, in the round where the lottery is executed, the lottery gate 310 is opened until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls are won, as in the operation of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the other rounds. It may be configured to be That is, in the round in which the lottery is performed, the lottery apparatus 300 also serves as the role of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. By the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 being executed during the jackpot game, it is possible for the player to suppress that the jackpot game is simply a task for obtaining the payout, and improve the interest of the player for the jackpot game be able to.

  Further, in a configuration in which the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is performed during the jackpot game, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be closed in the round in which the lottery is performed. That is, the lottery apparatus 300 may be configured to have the role of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. In this case, the lottery apparatus 300 is defined as a first specified winning opening, and the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as a second specified winning opening, and the first specified winning opening and the second specified winning opening according to the jackpot type. You may comprise so that the pattern of opening with may be changed. And, the setting of the flow path may be configured to be switched every round.

  For example, regardless of the jackpot type, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the front route in the first round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set as the back route in the second round. Then, if the jackpot type is the jackpot A, only the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is set to be open in one round, and only the second specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is open in the second to eighth rounds. Set as you want. Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the first round in which the front route is set, the gaming ball must advance the front route in the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B, only the second specified winning opening (specified winning opening 65a) is set to be open in one round and 3 to 8 rounds, and the first specified winning opening in two rounds (lottery) It is set to open only the gate 310). Since the first specific winning opening (lottery gate 310) is opened only in the second round in which the back route is set, the gaming ball necessarily advances the back route in the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 to 64, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, only two types of jackpot A and jackpot B are provided as jackpot types of special symbols, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to jackpot A and jackpot B, jackpot C where the number of rounds is 2R jackpot C, jackpot D, and the number of rounds for small round 2 small rounds A, small hits It is comprised so that B may be provided.

  Small hit A, small hit B, the state does not change after the end of each small hit, if you win any small hit in the low probability state of special symbol, the low special symbol even after the small hit end If the probability state is maintained and, conversely, one of the small hits is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit. In addition, when one of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the small hitting ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to open the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 before the start of the small hit even when the small hit is won, and the operation of the lottery gate 310 is performed. It becomes exactly the same as winning the jackpot A to D. The small hit differs from the big hit in that the gaming ball having entered the lottery gate 310 is discharged from the ball discharging passage 323 without progressing to the traveling direction distributing unit 330 and thereafter. In other words, the player can not recognize whether the winning is a jackpot or a jackpot until it can be determined whether the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later.

  Therefore, when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the player first expects the game ball to advance to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later (that is, the current hit is any of the big wins) If the game ball has progressed to the direction of distribution sorting section 330 or later, it is expected that the game ball will enter into one of the probability change ball openings 502 to 504, and after the start of the jackpot game, further The game will be played in the hope that it will be a large eight round jackpot. Thus, the player's sense of expectation can be periodically enhanced, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The main difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment is that the main control unit 110 partially changes the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202. The small hit type selection table 202e is added, and the small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 34) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the first embodiment. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment, the small hit flag 203k is provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the present embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The small hit flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not it is the opening timing of the drawing gate 310 of the drawing device 300 when the small hitting is won, and is turned on when it is the timing of opening the drawing gate 310. Ru. On the other hand, the small hit flag 203k is turned off after setting the opening of the lottery gate 310.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 shows the configuration of the ROM 202 of the control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment, a small hitting type selection table 202e is provided (FIGS. 59A and 59C). Further, in the first hit type selection table 202b, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment is that a table of "big hit C" and "big hit D" is added in addition to "big hit A" and "big hit B". 10 is different.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 39” in the first type counter C2 is “big hit A”. . In addition, the jackpot type when the random value is "50 to 89" is "jackpot B". Furthermore, the jackpot type when the random number value is "40 to 49" is "jackpot C", and the jackpot type when the random number value is "90 to 99" is "jackpot D". The “big hit C” and the “big hit D” added in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment are both a big hit with the maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds.

  In the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol performed by the lottery apparatus 300 (refer to FIG. 5) after the winning of the jackpot is determined, the “big jack C” and the “big jack D” are the flow path switching valve 331 a, According to 331b (see FIG. 9), the flow path through which the game balls pass is divided into a flow path on the front side of the rotary body 341 (front route) or a flow path on the eyebrow side (back route). That is, in the "big hit C", it is switched to the flow passage on the near side (front route) (see Fig. 9 (b)), and in the "big hit D", it is switched to the flow passage on the weir side (back route) See (a)).

  Since "big hit C" and "big hit D" are jackpots having a smaller number of rounds (that is, the player can obtain fewer prize balls) compared to "big hit A" and "big hit B", the lottery apparatus 300 If the game ball enters the inside and the game ball enters the entrance of any of the entrances and the jackpot game is started, the player can expect to pay out more balls 8 rounds Expect a big hit ("big hit A", or "big hit B"). Thus, if the player is expecting eight rounds of jackpots, a greater satisfaction can be given.

  The small hit type selection table 202e defines the first random number value of the random number counter C1 in the case where the small hit is won for each small hit type (FIG. 59 (c)). In the first random number counter C1, the small hit type when the random number value is “15 to 24” is “small hit A”. Further, the small hitting type in the case where the random number value is "141 to 150" is "small hitting B".

  As mentioned above, "small hitting A", "small hitting B" is something which condition does not change after the end of each small hitting, when it wins to any small hitting in the low probability state of the special design, it is small The low probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the hit, and conversely, when any small hit is won in the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol is maintained even after the end of the small hit . In addition, when one of the small hits is won in the time saving state, the game is started from the continuation of the time saving state even after the small hitting ends.

  In addition, “small hitting A” and “small hitting B” are selected when the lottery gate 310 is opened by the lottery apparatus 300 (refer to FIG. 5) after the win of the small winning is determined (high probability state Do you want the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b (see FIG. 9) to be the flow path on the near side (the front route) when showing fake movement to show that the transfer drawing is performed and not actually performing the drawing) There is a difference as to whether it is a channel on the weir side (back route). That is, in "small hitting A", it is switched to the flow passage on the near side (front route) (see Fig. 9 (b)), and in "small hitting B", it is switched to the flow passage in the weir side (back route) See FIG. 9 (a)).

  In fact, even if the player wins each small hit, the game ball does not advance to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 and the like provided with the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b, so the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b Even if you switch the key, there is no direct impact on the game, but by performing the switching operation of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b as in the case of winning various jackpots, it is a big hit or small hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether there is any, and to maintain a sense of expectation for winning the jackpot for a longer time.

Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  Among the special symbol variation processing (S104), in each of S201 to S211, and S213 and S214, each of S201 to S211 and S213 and S214 of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment The same process is performed. And, in the special symbol fluctuation process in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the lottery result (this lottery result) of the special symbol performed in the special symbol fluctuation start process is not the big hit of the special symbol in the process of S211. (S211: No) Next, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit of a special symbol (S221). And when it is judged that it is not a small hit of a special symbol (S221: No), it shifts to processing of S213. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit (S221: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is turned on (S222), and the present process is ended.

  By turning on the small hitting flag 203k, in the small hitting gate processing (S1021) described later with reference to FIG. 62, the drawing gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened before the start of the small hit, and the special symbol It is possible to make it appear as if a transition lottery to a high probability state of is performed. Therefore, since it is possible to delay the timing at which the player can recognize whether the player wins this time is a small hit or a big hit, the expectation for the jackpot of the player and the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol are maintained longer. You can

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110.

  Of the main processes of the main controller 110, in the processes of S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1004 and S1006 to S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 34) of the main controller 110 in the first embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main processing of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, when the processing of S1004 is completed, the small hitting gate processing (S1021) is executed. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 62, the small hitting gate process (S1021) opens the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 when it wins a small hit, and shifts to a high probability state of special symbols. It is a process for operating as if it is lottery.

When the small hitting gate process ends, next, the big hit control process 2 (S1022) is executed instead of the big hit control process (FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. The jackpot control process 2 is, similarly to the jackpot control process (FIG. 36), a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a.
Furthermore, when the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) is completed, the small hitting control process (S1023) is executed. The small hitting control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hitting and opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a. When the small hitting control process (S1023) ends, the process proceeds to S1006.

  Next, small hitting gate processing (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In the small hitting gate process (S1021), as described above, when the small winning is won, the drawing gate 310 of the drawing apparatus 300 is opened to draw the drawing whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Is a process for operating as if it were performed.

  In the small hitting gate process (S1021), first, it is judged whether the small hitting flag 203k is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S3801: Yes), setting is performed to make a transition lottery to a high probability state of the special symbol fake on the basis of having won the small hit. Specifically, first, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to a route determined according to the small hitting type (S3802), and opening of the lottery gate 310 is set (S3803). Next, the release flag 203i is turned on (S3804), the small hit flag is turned off (S3805), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is not on (ie, off) (S3801: No), it is then determined whether the release flag 203i is on (S3806), the release flag 203i is If it is on (S3806: Yes), it indicates that the lottery gate 310 is open, so it is determined whether or not entering the lottery gate 310 is detected (S3807).

If it is detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3807: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed so that the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 additionally (S3808) The release flag 203i is turned off, and the process proceeds to the process of S3812.
On the other hand, when it is not detected that the game ball has entered the lottery gate 310 (S3810: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied (S3810). The closing condition of the lottery gate 310 other than the game ball entering the ball is that the maximum opening period (for example, 30 seconds) of the lottery gate 310 elapses.

  If it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is satisfied as a result of the processing of S3810 (S3810: Yes), the start of the small hitting game is set (S3811), and the closing of the lottery gate 310 is set ( S3808), the release flag 203i is turned off (S3809), and the process proceeds to S3812. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the lottery gate 310 is not satisfied (S3810: No), the processing of S3808, S3809, and S3811 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S3812. If it is determined in the process of S3806 that the release flag 203i is not on (ie, off) (S3806: No), the process of S3807 to S3809 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3812.

  In the process of S3812, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the ball discharging passage 323 (S3812). If it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the ball discharging passage 323, the small hitting game is started. The setting is made (S3813), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharging passage 323, the present process is ended as it is.

  When the start of the small hitting game is set at the timing when the entry to the lottery gate 310 is detected, the small hitting game starts soon to determine whether the gaming ball reaches the advancing direction distributing unit 330, There is a possibility that the player may recognize that the current hit is a small hit without giving a sense of expectation for the game ball to advance to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, and the interest may be curtailed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if it is a small hit, the small hit game is not started until it is determined that the gaming ball entering the lottery gate 310 has passed the ball discharging passage 323, The timing at which it is possible to determine whether a jackpot or a jackpot is made can be delayed to allow the player to maintain a sense of expectation for the jackpot longer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the jackpot control process 2 (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 2 (S1022).

  In the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process 2, the same processes as the processes of S1101 to S1111 of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, in the jackpot control process 2 in the second embodiment, when the process of S1109 is completed, it is determined whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S1121), jackpot A or jackpot B When it discriminate | determines (S1121: Yes), it transfers to the process of S1110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the present jackpot is neither jackpot A nor jackpot B (that is, jackpot C or jackpot D) (S1121: No), then whether the value of the round number counter is 2 or not (Ie, whether or not it is the second round) (S1122), if it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 2 (that is, it is the second round) (S1122: Yes), the number of rounds Since it means that it is the end timing of the jackpot C which is the jackpot of 2 rounds, or the jackpot D, it shifts to the processing of S1111, sets the end of the jackpot (S1111), and ends this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (i.e., 1) (S1122: No), since the jackpot game of the second round is left, the present processing ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, jackpot types different in the number of rounds are provided, but by performing the processing of S1121 and S1122 of the jackpot control processing 2 (S1022), the jackpot game of the number of rounds according to the jackpot type Can be performed.

  Next, small hitting control processing (S1023) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this small hitting control process (S1023). As described above, the small hitting control process (S1023) is a process for executing various effects according to the small hitting and opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the small hitting control process (S1023), first, it is judged whether or not it is the start timing of the small hitting A or the small hitting B (S3901). The start of the small hit is set in the process of S3811 or S3813 of the small hit gate process (see FIG. 62).

  As a result of the process of S3901, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hitting A or the small hitting B (S3901: Yes), the value of the round number counter 203g is set to 0 and the present process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the start timing of the small hit A nor the start timing of the small hit B (S3901: No), it is then determined whether a small hit game is currently in progress (S3903).

  If it is determined that the current game is not a small hit game (S3903: No), the present process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current game is a small hit game (S3903), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S3904). Then, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S3904), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S3905), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S3906). The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81. After setting the number-of-rounds command, the number of rounds to be newly started matches the value of the number of rounds counter 203g by adding 1 to the value of the number-of-rounds counter 203g (S3907), and this processing ends Do.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3904, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S3904: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, or after the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, a predetermined number of balls are present. When winning (for example, 10), it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  When it is determined in the process of S3908 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S3908: No), the process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S3908: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S3909), and the round number counter 203g It is determined whether the value is 2 (S3910). When it is determined in the process of S3910 that the value of the round number counter is not 2 (that is, 1) (S3910: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round number counter is 8 (S3910: Yes), since the current is the end timing of the second round (ie, the final round), the end of the small hit is set (S3911), The present process ends and returns to the main process.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, in addition to the jackpot A and jackpot B in the eight rounds in the jackpot game, as the type of "jackpot of special symbol", the round in the jackpot game There are two rounds of jackpots C and jackpots D. By providing two rounds of jackpots with few winning balls that can be acquired, it is possible to cause the player to play a game expecting to be won in eight rounds of jackpots with a large number of winning balls to be paid out. Therefore, if the player wins eight rounds of jackpots as expected by the player, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction. That is, by providing jackpots C and jackpots D with a small number of balls, the joy for winning jackpots A and jackpots B with many balls can be increased, and the merits of jackpot A and jackpot B can be enhanced.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, small hits A and small hits B are provided separately from various jackpots. When various jackpots are won, based on the lottery result performed by the lottery apparatus 300, transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, or transition to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol However, in the case of a small hit, the state immediately before winning the small hit continues even after the end of the small hit game. That is, when the small hitting A or the small hitting B is won, the drawing apparatus 300 does not perform a drawing of whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the small hit A or the small hit B is won, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened before the small hit game is started, and the lottery apparatus 300 The game ball is configured to be able to enter the inside of the game. Further, the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are also switched to the front route or the back route as in the case of winning the jackpot. Then, the game ball having entered the ball is discharged from the discharge passage 323 without flowing down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later. As a result, even if the player wins each small hit, it seems as if a lottery is made to the player whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol by the game ball entering the lottery device 300. You can Therefore, the player can not identify whether the winning is a jackpot or a jackpot until it is confirmed whether or not the gaming ball has flowed down to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and an expectation to the jackpot is expected. The feeling can be sustained longer. And, if the player is a jackpot as expected, a greater sense of satisfaction can be given. That is, by setting small hits A and small hits B in which the transition lottery to the high probability state of the special symbol is not performed, it is a pleasure to win various jackpots that may shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. It can increase the appreciation of various jackpots.

  During the game, the player can determine whether the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b provided in the traveling direction distribution unit 330 of the lottery apparatus 300 is the state of the near route or the state of the far route. It can be viewed visually. In addition, the player can also check during the game whether the state of the distribution rotary body 341 provided in the entrance distribution unit 340 of the lottery apparatus 300 is in the state of swinging to the left or in the state of swinging to the right. It can be viewed visually. When the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route and the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right, the gaming ball entered in the lottery apparatus 300 has a time-saving ball entry opening. I will enter 501. That is, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, in such a case, the player feels that the game ball does not want to advance to the traveling direction distribution unit 330 or later, and therefore, it is expected that the current hit is a small hit, and the player enters the lottery device 300. It will confirm the whereabouts of the game ball which it balls.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is expected to switch to the near route, which is advantageous for the player, until the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched after the third symbol is aligned. A player can play a game. When the gaming ball flows down the near route, since the ball enters into either the probability changing ball entrance 502 or the probability changing ball entrance 504, the state of the distribution rotary body 341 is shifted to the left (see FIG. 13). , See FIG. 15), to move to the high probability state of the special symbol even in the next lottery.

  In addition, after the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the near route, the game balls advance to the progress direction distribution unit 330 or later until the game balls enter the lottery apparatus 300 (that is, the hit is It is possible to make a player play a game by expecting to be a jackpot). Further, after the jackpot game starts, the player can be made to play the jackpot game by expecting to rush into the third round until the end timing of the second round. Since the jackpot type is provided with only two types of jackpots of 8 rounds and jackpots of 2 rounds, it is to determine that it is a jackpot of 8 rounds at the stage of entering the third round.

  On the other hand, when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the back route side when the player wins a hit (any of various jackpots and various small hits), when the game ball advances to the traveling direction distribution unit 330, It will flow down the back route. Therefore, the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right (see FIG. 12 and FIG. 14), and the state is disadvantageous compared to the state of swinging to the left. It is possible to make the player play a game by anticipating that the game does not progress to 330 or later (that is, this hit is a small hit).

  Therefore, according to conditions such as the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the distribution rotary body 341, it is possible to play the game while giving the player a variety of sense of expectation at various timings. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 72, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment described above, the lottery apparatus 300 for performing lottery of whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the front face of the variable display unit 80 Arranged in the visual right direction, it was configured to draw a lottery whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the jackpot game starts and the special winning opening (large When the opening 65) is opened, the lottery device 300 is configured to be able to enter a game ball.

  Since the lottery gate 310 is disposed inside the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a, the state of opening / closing of the drawing gate 310 or the gaming ball entering the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is drawing Although it becomes difficult for the player to see whether or not the player enters the gate 310 for the gate, it is configured to be visible by the player as in the other embodiments with respect to each configuration of the lottery apparatus 300 after the flow path 320 There is.

  In addition, in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, separately from the lottery apparatus 300, the gaming ball having entered the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the gaming ball passes can be discharged. A ball discharge passage 701 (not shown) is provided, and when the lottery gate 310 is closed, the game ball is discharged via the ball discharge passage 701. . On the other hand, when the gaming ball enters the lottery gate 310 into the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the gaming ball enters the lottery device 300 from the lottery gate 310. You will be able to play balls. The gaming balls having entered the lottery apparatus 300 are discharged from the ball discharging passage 323 or the ball discharging passage 421. Even when the lottery gate 310 is opened, the passage for discharge 701 without entering the lottery gate 310 due to the track of the gaming ball entering the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. May progress to

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to obtain an opportunity for a lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 while acquiring a prize ball simply by aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and striking the gaming ball.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, four types of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D are provided as the jackpot types of special symbols, and the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot type. And had switched the number of rounds in the jackpot game, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, six types of jackpot types (front route jackpot A, front route jackpot B, front route jackpot C, back route jackpot A, back route It has increased to jackpot B, back route jackpot C).

  The fore route jackpot A and the fore route jackpot B are jackpots with eight rounds of jackpots. In addition, the fore route jackpot C is a jackpot having two rounds of jackpots. In the front route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set to distribute the game balls to the front routes.

  Oku route jackpot A, Oku route jackpot B is the jackpot of eight rounds of jackpots. In addition, the back route jackpot C is the jackpot of the number of rounds of the jackpot of two rounds. In the back route jackpots A to C, the lottery gate 310 is opened when the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set in the direction of distributing the game balls to the back route.

  The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66, but at each jackpot, the state of the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the near route or the back route according to the round number of the jackpot.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in configuration in that the main control unit 110 changes the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b of the ROM 202. The round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, the big hit end flag 203o, and the passage open flag 203p are provided instead of the small hit flag 203k provided in the RAM 203. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the partial process included in the main process (FIG. 61) are different from those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The second embodiment will be described with respect to other configurations, other processes executed by the main control unit 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. In place of the small hitting flag 203k provided in the RAM 203 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 of the present embodiment replaces the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, the lottery execution flag 203n, and the big hit ending flag 203o. A passage open flag 203p is provided. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The round start flag 203l is a flag indicating the timing for judging whether or not to open the lottery gate 310, and is turned on when a new round is started in a big hit or a small hit (see S1134 in FIG. 69). After setting the opening of the lottery gate 310, the lottery gate 310 is turned off (see S4007 in FIG. 71).

  The closing flag 203m is a flag indicating whether it is time to close the drawing gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 in the big hit game, and the round is ended during the big hit and the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. When it is turned on (see S1135 in FIG. 69). On the other hand, it is turned off at the time of the jackpot start and when the closing of the lottery gate 310 is set.

  The lottery execution flag 203n is a flag indicating whether or not a transition lottery to a high probability state of a special symbol has been executed by the lottery apparatus 300, and the gaming ball is a time-saving ball entrance 501, or a probability change ball entrance 502-504. Is turned on when it is detected that the ball has entered the ball entrance of any of the above and is turned off at the start of the big hit (see S1133 in FIG. 69).

  The jackpot end flag 203o is turned on when the jackpot end is set (see S1137 in FIG. 69) and turned off at the start of the jackpot (see S1134 in FIG. 69). The passage opening flag 203p is a flag indicating whether the drawing gate 310 is open and the gaming ball can enter the induction passage 321, and is turned on when the drawing gate 310 is opened. (See S4006 in FIG. 71.) When the jackpot is started or when the lottery gate 310 is closed (S4005, S4014 in FIG. 71).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 shows the configuration of the first contact type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the control device 110 in the third embodiment. In the first hit type selection table 202b of the second embodiment, the correspondence relationship between the random number value of the first hit type counter and the big hit type is defined, but in the third embodiment, in addition to this, the big hit The state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the state of the lottery gate 310 for each round number are defined for each jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 66, in the third embodiment, the preceding route jackpot A is won when the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 0-9. Further, in the front route jackpot A, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. In addition, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in these rounds, and the gaming ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and therefore, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 10 to 59, the preceding route jackpot B is won. In the front route jackpot B, in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the front route. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and therefore, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 60 to 69, the preceding route jackpot C is won. In the front route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened. Can enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Then, since the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  If the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 70 to 74, the back route jackpot A is won. In the back route jackpot A, at the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched to the state of the back route. In addition, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in these rounds, and the gaming ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, and the eighth round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the preceding route. Further, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and therefore, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  When the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 75 to 95, the back route jackpot B is won. Further, in the back route jackpot B, in the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route. Further, among these rounds, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened in the rounds other than the second round, and the game ball can enter the guidance passage 321.

  On the other hand, in the first round, the third round, the fifth round, and the seventh round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Further, the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened in these rounds, and therefore, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  If the random number value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 96 to 99, the back route jackpot C is won. At the back route jackpot C, in the second round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the back route, and the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened, and the gaming ball is moved to the induction passage 321 It becomes possible to enter the ball. On the other hand, in the first round, the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the state of the front route. Then, since the lottery gate of the lottery apparatus 300 is not opened, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321.

  As described above, even if the lottery gate 310 is opened, the gaming ball having entered the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a can not necessarily advance into the lottery gate 310, and the ball discharge passage 701 There is a case to enter the ball. In addition, the round may end without entering any one ball to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in one round. If the game ball does not enter the lottery gate in the round where the lottery gate 310 is opened inside the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a for these reasons, the player is required to make a round for the lottery. Because it can not be determined whether it was or not, it is a big hit (front route big hit A to C) of the front route or a big hit on the back route (back route big hit A to C only by confirming the state of the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b) ) Can not determine. Thus, the expectation that the current jackpot is the jackpot of the near route which is advantageous for the player can be sustained longer.

  When the small hit A is won, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b switches in the same manner as the preceding route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit. When the small hit B is won, the operation of the flow path distributing valves 331a and 331b switches in the same manner as the back route big hit C, but the lottery gate 310 is not opened during the small hit.

  As described above, by making the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b common to a part of the large hit and a small hit, the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b can be confirmed only by confirming the operation of the flow path distribution valves 331a and 331b. It can be difficult to determine if it is a hit. Therefore, the sense of expectation to the jackpot can be sustained longer.

  The first hit type selection table 202b is not limited to the combination shown in FIG. For example, the round for opening the lottery gate 310 may be limited to only one round regardless of the jackpot type. Further, for example, the operation of the passage switching valves 331a and 331b may be common, and only the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened may be changed.

Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment
Next, various types of processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  Of the special symbol variation processing (S104), in each of S201 to S211, S221, and S213, S214, S201 to S211, S221, and S213, of the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 60) in the second embodiment, respectively. The same process as each process of S214 is performed. And, in the special symbol fluctuation process in the third embodiment, in the process of S211, it is determined that the lottery result (this lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol fluctuation start process is the big hit of the special symbol In the case (S211: Yes), next, the start of the jackpot game is set (S231), and this processing is ended. Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S221 that the current lottery result is a small hit of the special symbol (S221: Yes), the start of the small hit game is set (S232), This process ends.

  Next, main processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing main processing of main controller 110.

  Of the main processes of main controller 110, in each of S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1017, S1001 to S1003 and S1006 to S1006 of the main process (see FIG. 61) of main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The same process as each process of S1017 is executed. Then, in the main process of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1003 is completed, the big hit control process 3 (S1031) is executed instead of the big hit control process 2 (FIG. 63) in the second embodiment. . The jackpot control process 3 is, similarly to the jackpot control process 2 (FIG. 63), a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  Also, when the jackpot control process 3 ends, the small hitting control process 2 (S1032) is executed instead of the small hitting control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment. In this small hitting control process 2 (S1032), as in the small hitting control process (FIG. 64) in the second embodiment, the execution of various effects according to the small hit and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are opened. Or it is a process for closing.

  When the small hitting control process 2 (S1032) is ended, next, the channel switching process (S1033) is executed. The flow path switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. When the flow path switching process (S1033) ends, the small hitting setting process (S1034) is executed. The small hitting setting process (S1034) is a process of switching the states of the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b during the small hitting. When the small hitting setting process (S1034) ends, each process after S1006 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, a jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 3 (S1031).

  In the respective processes of S1101 to S1111 and S1122 among the big hit control process 3, the same processes as the respective processes of S1101 to S1111 and S1122 of the big hit control process 2 (see FIG. 63) in the second embodiment are executed. Ru. Then, in the jackpot control process 3 in the third embodiment, when the process of S1102 is completed, the round start flag 203l, the closing flag 203m, and the lottery execution flag 203n are turned off (S1131 to S1133). The big hit end flag 203o and the passage open flag 203p are also turned off after the process of S1102 (not shown).

  In the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1105 ends, the round start flag 203l is turned on (S1134), and it is the timing to set the open / close state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310. After showing, the processing shifts to the processing of S1106 and thereafter. Based on the fact that the round start flag is turned on by the process of S1134, various settings according to the jackpot type are performed by a flow path switching process (S1033) described later.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot control process 3, when the process of S1109 ends, the closing flag 203m is turned on to indicate that it is the closing timing of the lottery gate 310 (S1135). Next, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot game is the back route jackpot C, or the near route jackpot C (ie, whether or not it is a two round jackpot) (S1136). As a result of the process of S1136, when it is determined that neither the back route jackpot C nor the fore route jackpot C is (that is, the jackpot of 8 rounds) (S1136: No), the processing proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the back route jackpot C or the fore route jackpot C is the result of the process of S1136 (S1136: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122), 2 If not (i.e., 1), the process ends. On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter 203g is 2 (S1122: Yes), the end of the big hit is set (S1111), the big hit end flag 203o is turned on (S1137), and this processing is finished.

  Next, small hitting control processing 2 (S1032) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process 2 (S1032).

  Of the small hitting control process 2, in the processes of S3901 to S3911, the same processes as the processes of S3901 to S3911 of the small hitting control process (see FIG. 64) in the second embodiment are executed. Then, in the small hitting control process 2 in the third embodiment, when the process of S3902 is completed, the round start flag 203l is turned off (S3921), and the present process is ended. In addition, when the process of S3905 ends, the round start flag 203l is turned on in order to set the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the small hitting type in the small hitting setting process (see FIG. 72) described later. (S3922) The processing after S3906 is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the channel switching process (S1033) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the flow path switching process (S1033). The flow channel switching process (S1033) is a process for setting the flow channel switching valves 331a and 331b and the lottery gate 310.

  In this flow channel switching process (S1033), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203l is on (S4001), and if it is determined that the round start flag 203l is on (S4001: Yes) The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the first hit type selection table 202b (S4002). For example, if the jackpot type is the preceding route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (ie, it is the start timing of the fifth round), “▲” in the first hit type selection table 202b. Since the symbol of “is attached and it is defined that the flow path of the back route is established, the setting of the flow path switching valves 331 a and 331 b is switched to the back route.

  In this embodiment, since the round start flag 203g is turned on at the round start timing at various jackpots and at the round start timing at various small hits, the round start flag 203g is based on the small round start timing. There is a case where it is turned on to shift to the process of S4002, but in this case, it is configured to determine that it is not a big hit (that is, it is a small hit) and to end this process.

  When the process of S4002 ends, it is specified based on the jackpot type and the first hit type selection table 202b whether or not the lottery gate 310 is opened (S4003). For example, if the jackpot type is the preceding route jackpot B and the value of the round counter 203g is 5 (ie, it is the start timing of the fifth round), “▲” in the first hit type selection table 202b. The symbol “is attached, and it is prescribed to close the lottery gate 310 so that the game ball can not advance to the induction passage 323. Therefore, it is specified that it indicates the closing of the lottery gate 310. .

  When the process of S4003 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the specification result of whether to open the drawing gate 310 indicates the closing of the drawing gate 310 (S4004), and the specification result indicates the closing. If it is one (S4004: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is closed, the passage open flag 203p is turned off (S4005), and the process proceeds to S4007. On the other hand, if the specific result is not closed, ie, indicates the opening of the lottery gate 310 (S4004: No), the lottery gate 310 is opened and the passage open flag 203p is turned on (S4006), It transfers to the process of S4007. In the process of S4007, the round start flag 203g is turned off (S4007), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S4001 that the round start flag 203l is not on (that is, off) (S4001: No), it is determined whether the closing flag 203m is on (S4008). When it is determined that the closing flag is not on (that is, off) (S4008: No), the process of S4009 to S4014 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4015.

  On the other hand, if the closing flag 203m is on (S4008: Yes), it is determined whether the big hit end flag 203o is on (S4009), if it is not on (i.e. if it is off) the big hit ending timing Since this does not mean that the processing is not performed, the processing of S4010 and S4011 is skipped to shift to the processing of S4012.

  On the other hand, if the big hit end flag 203o is on (S4009: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010). If the lottery execution flag 203n is on (S4010: Yes), the gaming ball is already in one of the ball entrances (one of the hour entry ball entry 501 and the probability entry ball entry 502 to 504) in the lottery apparatus 300. Since it is decided to enter the ball and to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or to shift to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot, the processing of S4011 is skipped, and the flow proceeds to the processing of S4012.

  On the other hand, if the lottery execution flag 203n is off (S4010: No), it means that it is not determined whether to shift to the high probability state or the low probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. The probability change flag 203e is turned off so that the jackpot is not ended before the state after the end is determined, 100 is set to the hour / hour counter 203f (S4011), and the process proceeds to the process of S4012. That is, if it is not determined whether the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol or the transition to the low probability state after the end of the jackpot is just before the end of the jackpot, the game ball enters the time saving ball entrance 501 It will be in the same state as you did.

  In the process of S4012, it is determined whether or not the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012), and if the passage opening flag 203p is on (S4012: Yes), the lottery gate 310 is opened, so it is opened. The selected lottery gate 310 is closed (S4013), the passage open flag 203p is turned off (S4014), and the process proceeds to the process of S4015. On the other hand, if the passage open flag 203p is not on (that is, if it is off), the processing of S4013 and S4014 is skipped and the processing proceeds to the processing of S4015.

  Next, in the processing of 4015, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has entered the entrance of any of the definite change entrance ball openings 502 to 504 based on the detection result of the prize sensors 420a to 420 d (S4015), If it is determined that entry into a certain probability ball entry ball is detected (S4015: Yes), the probability change flag 203e is turned on (S4016) to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol after a big hit The lottery execution flag 203 n is turned on to end the present process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the ball entrance of any of the definite change ball entrances 502 to 504 (S4015: No), whether or not the game ball has entered the time saving ball entrance 501. If it is determined that the ball has entered the ball (S4017), it is shifted to a low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit is finished, and the time symbol of the normal symbol is determined. In order to set the state, the probability change flag 203e is turned off, 100 is set in the hour / minute counter (S4018), and the lottery execution flag 203n is turned on to complete the processing. If it is determined in the process of S4017 that the time-short entry ball entrance 501 has not entered the ball, the present process is ended and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the small hitting setting process (S1034) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the small hitting setting process (S1034). The small hitting setting process is a process of switching the states of the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b during a small hitting.

  In this small hitting setting process (S1034), first, it is determined whether or not the round start flag 203g is on (S4101), and if it is determined that the round start flag 203g is on (S4101: Yes), the round counter The flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are set based on the value 203g and the small hitting type (S4102). As described above, the small hitting A and the near route big hitting C share the same setting of the flow passage switching valves 331 a and 331 b in each round. That is, if the small hitting type is the small hitting A, the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the near route (see FIG. 66). Similarly, the small hitting B and the back route big hitting C have the same setting of the flow passage switching valves 331a and 331b in each round. That is, if the small hitting type is small hitting B, the value of the round counter 203g is 1 or 2 (that is, even if it is the first round or the second round), the flow path The setting of the switching valves 331a and 331b is switched to the back route (see FIG. 66).

  After setting the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b by the process of S4101, next, the lottery gate 310 is closed to prevent the game ball from entering the induction passage 323 (S4103), and the round start flag 203l is turned off. Then (S4104), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4101 that the round start flag 203l is off, the process of S4102 to S4104 is skipped and the process is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a. The lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are provided at different positions, and the gaming ball is moved to the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a until the lottery result by the drawing apparatus 300 is determined. If the game ball can not enter the ball, if the game ball does not enter the lottery gate 310 properly, the game ball will be consumed, which may cause the player to feel lost.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the start of the jackpot game, just by striking out the gaming ball by aiming at the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity by the lottery device 300 while acquiring the ball. Can. Therefore, since it is not necessary to consume a large number of game balls in order to cause the lottery apparatus 300 to perform the lottery, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that he or she has lost.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is also performed during the big hit game, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched according to the round, and the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b are switched. Since the pattern of is also varied depending on the jackpot type, it is difficult for the player to grasp the round in which the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is performed.

  Therefore, since the player can be made to perform the jackpot game while carefully checking the state of the lottery apparatus 300, the jackpot game becomes like a monotonous task only to obtain a game. It can be suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the opening of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening of the drawing gate 310 (opening of the guiding passage 321) are performed with almost no time lag. In addition, with regard to the closing of the special winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the drawing gate 310, the time lag is almost the same. On the other hand, the timing of opening / closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be configured to deviate from the timing of starting the round. In addition, the opening and closing timing of the guiding passage 321 may be configured to deviate from the opening and closing timing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  The deviation of the opening and closing timing will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a and the timing of opening and closing the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in one round of the big hit game. . In FIGS. 73 (a) and 73 (b), the chart described as "large opening" shows the open / close state of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a, and "guide passage" The chart described indicates the open / close state of the guiding passage 321 (the open / close state of the lottery gate 310). In each chart, "open" indicates a state in which it is open, and "closed" indicates a state in which it is closed.

  In FIG. 73 (a), the jackpot type is one of the preceding route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is in the state of the preceding route; When the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is the back route state (that is, the game ball can enter the guiding passage 321) 15 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a in the case of a round) and the timing of opening and closing of the induction passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), a time lag (for example, 3 seconds) is generated until the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened with respect to the start timing of the round. Then, a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) occurs between the opening of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a and the opening of the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310). As a result, since the game ball can be made to enter the guiding passage 321 after the setting of the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is reliably switched, the game ball is distributed in the traveling direction while the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is switched. It is possible to prevent the game ball from advancing along a route reverse to the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b after passing through the section 330.

  In addition, a time lag (for example, 2 seconds) is generated between the closing of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the closing of the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Thus, while the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied, the game ball entering the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is also allowed to enter the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) As the game ball entering the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a reaches the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. The player can be prevented from feeling dissatisfied.

  In FIG. 73 (b), the jackpot type is any of the preceding route jackpots A to C, and the state of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is in the back root state, and the jackpot type is back If the state of the flow path switching valve 331a, 331b is the state of the near route, that is, the gaming ball can not enter the guiding passage 321, which is one of the route jackpots A to C 15 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening and closing of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a in the case of a round) and the timing of opening and closing of the induction passage 321 (lottery gate 310).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened, and the specific winning opening (large) The opening port 65a is configured to be opened at the timing when the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is closed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310). Further, as described above, the player is able to recognize that the guidance passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is opened in the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, so that the player is asked , Even in the round where the lottery is not performed, it can give an expectation that the lottery may be performed in this round.

  In addition, depending on whether or not it is a round that enables the game ball to enter the game in the guidance passage 321 (drawing gate 310), the timing when the guidance passage 321 (drawing gate 310) is opened is specified winning opening (large Opening port) Before the opening of the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) in all rounds, before or after the opening of the opening 65a, before the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened You may

  Then, in the round where the game ball can enter the induction passage 321 (lottery gate 310), the flow path switching is performed in order to cause the game ball to enter after the setting of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b is completely finished. The setting of the valves 331a and 331b may be configured to be performed simultaneously with the start of a new round.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to enter the gaming ball into the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) even if the opening timing of the guiding passage 321 (lottery gate 310) is confirmed. Because it can not be determined, it can be hard to tell whether this round is a round for making a transition lottery to a high probability state of special symbols, and the expectation of the player can be sustained longer. Can.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Then, the modification of the pachinko machine 10 of 3rd embodiment is demonstrated. In the gaming machine of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and among the gaming balls entered into the lottery gate 310, one of the gaming balls that can advance to the guiding passage 322 is 1 A passage shut off valve 324 was provided to be restricted to the ball. The gaming ball whose progress to the guiding passage 322 is restricted by the passage closing valve 324 is discharged to the outside of the lottery apparatus 300 through the ball discharging passage 323.

  On the other hand, in the present modification, all the game balls entering the lottery gate 310 can travel to the guiding passage 322. That is, the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, so that all the game balls entering the lottery gate 310 can reach the distributing rotary body 341.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, based on the ball entry port where the gaming ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened (one of the time-short entry ball entry 501 and the probability entry ball entry 502-504), It is configured to determine whether to set the special symbol high probability state or the special symbol low probability state after the big hit ends.

  With this configuration, the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, so that the lottery apparatus 300 can be made compact. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and the lottery device 300 provided therein can be enhanced.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15 again, the operation of the gaming ball having entered the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is opened will be described.

  As described above, in this modification, since the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are not provided, the specified winning hole (large opening) 65a enters the ball and is open to the drawing gate 310. All the game balls that have entered the ball reach the traveling direction distribution unit 330. As described above, in the advancing direction distributing unit 330, the advancing route of the game ball is determined according to the jackpot type, and in the case of the near route jackpots A to C, the flow path switching valve 331a of the advancing direction distributing unit 330. , And 331b are in the state shown in FIG. 9B (the state of the preceding route). Therefore, the game balls flow down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341. On the other hand, in the case of the back route jackpots A to C, the states of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b of the advancing direction distribution unit 330 become the state (the state of the back route) shown in FIG. Therefore, the gaming balls will flow down to the back side of the distribution rotary body 341.

  First, the state of the back route and the state where the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the right will be described with reference to FIG. In the case of the state of the back route and in the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right, the gaming ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body travels in the guiding passage 408a (FIG. 12A). As described above, the gaming ball having advanced through the guiding passage 408a (FIG. 12 (b)) drops without rotating the distribution rotating body 341 and enters the short time ball entry port 501 (FIG. 12 (c)) ). That is, the ball entry port at which the game ball entered the specified winning combination port (large opening port) 65 a first enters the time-shorted ball entry port 501. As a result, after the big hit is finished, the state shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and the time change state of the normal symbol for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of changes is 100).

  In the same round of the jackpot, since the game ball which reaches distribution rotary body 341 after that travels similarly induction passage 408a, all game balls enter the entrance 501 without swinging rotary body 341. Enter the ball. Therefore, when the state of the back route at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 swing to the right, as in the case where the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, the big hit The distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right at the end time, and it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol and for a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of changes is 100). It becomes time saving state.

  Further, the state of the front route and the state in which the distributing rotary body 341 is swung to the right will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. FIG. In the state of the front route and in the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right, the gaming ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body travels through the guiding passage 408b. As described above, the game ball advanced in the guiding passage 408b is prevented from advancing by the ball stopper 403a (FIG. 13A). Thereafter, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stopper portion 403a, the distribution rotating body 341 is rotated until it swings to the left (FIG. 13 (b)), and the rotation of the distribution rotating body 341 After the operation is completed, the gaming ball falls and enters the ball entrance 502 with probability. That is, the ball entry port at which the game ball entered the specified winning combination port (large opening port) 65 a first enters the probability ball entry port 502. Thereby, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, within the same round of the jackpot, the gaming ball which has reached the distribution rotating body 341 thereafter travels the guiding passage 408d due to the change of the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 to the left (FIG. 15). And as above-mentioned, the game ball which flows down guidance channel | path 408d (Fig.15 (a)) enters into the definite transformation ball inlet 504, without rocking the distribution rotary body 341 (Fig.15 (c)). Therefore, the gaming ball entering the lottery gate 310 enters the certainty ball inlet 504 without swinging the rotating member 341, except for the gaming ball which has reached the distributing rotating body 341 first.

  Therefore, when the state of the route on the near side at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, the large hitting as in the case where the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided. At the time of the end, the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, and it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Further, the state of the back route and the state where the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 and 14. In the state of the back route and in the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left, the gaming ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body travels in the guiding passage 408c. As described above, the game ball advanced in the guiding passage 408c is prevented from advancing by the ball stopper 405a (FIG. 14A). Thereafter, based on the weight of the game ball being applied to the ball stopper 405a, the distribution rotating body 341 is rotated until it swings to the right (FIG. 14 (b)), and the rotation of the distribution rotating body 341 After the completion of the operation, the gaming ball falls and enters the ball ball outlet 503 with certainty. That is, the ball entry port at which the game ball entered the specified winning combination port (large opening port) 65 a first enters the probability ball entry port 503. Thereby, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, within the same round of the jackpot, the gaming ball which has reached the distribution rotating body 341 thereafter travels in the guiding passage 408a as the direction of the distribution rotating body 341 changes to the right (FIG. 12). And as above-mentioned, the game ball which flows down the induction | guidance | derivation passage 408a (FIG. 12 (a)) enters the time saving ball entrance 501 without rocking the distribution rotary body 341 (FIG. 12 (c)). Therefore, the gaming balls entering the lottery gate 310 enter the time saving ball entrance 501 without swinging the rotating member 341, except for the gaming balls which first reach the distributing rotating body 341. In addition, as mentioned above, since the state after the big hit end is set based on the type of the entrance which entered the ball first, the game ball other than the game ball which first reaches the distribution rotary body 341 is a time saving ball No matter how many balls enter 501, the setting of the state after the big hit is not overwritten.

  Therefore, when the state of the back route is at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left, as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, the big hit At the end time, the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the right, and the state shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  Next, the state of the front route and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 is swung to the left will be described with reference to FIG. In the state of the front route and in the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left, the gaming ball that first reaches the distribution rotating body travels in the guiding path 408d (FIG. 15A). As described above, the gaming ball having advanced through the guiding passage 408d (FIG. 15 (b)) drops without rotating the distribution rotating body 341 as it is and enters the ball socket 5034 (FIG. 15 (c)) ). That is, the ball entry port at which the game ball entered the specified winning combination port (large opening port) 65 a first enters the probability ball entry port 504. Thereby, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  In the same round of the jackpot, since the game ball which reaches distribution rotary body 341 after that travels similarly induction passage 408d, all game balls do not swing distribution rotary body 341, and surely change ball insertion Enter the mouth 504. Therefore, when the state of the route on the near side at the start of the round and the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left, as in the case where the ball discharge passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 are provided, the big hit At the time of the end, the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left, and it shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the ball entry port where the gaming ball first enters after the lottery gate 310 is opened (one of the hour-short entry ball entry 501 and the probability entry ball entry 502-504). Lottery, even if a plurality of game balls progress to the distribution rotating body 341 by configuring to determine whether to set the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, the drawing The lottery result by the device 300 can be the same as that of the other embodiments. Further, the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 at the end of the big hit can also be in the same state as in the other embodiments.

  As a result, the ball discharging passage 323 and the passage closing valve 324 can be omitted, and the lottery device 300 can be made compact, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a can be enhanced.

  In the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the opening pattern of the lottery gate 310 and the switching pattern of the flow path And had changed according to the jackpot type. On the other hand, the lottery apparatus 300 may be provided outside the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the lottery apparatus 300 and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a may be used as the specific winning opening. In this case, the lottery apparatus 300 is defined as a first specified winning opening, and the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is defined as a second specified winning opening, and the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first hit type selection table 202b. In the round where the game ball can be entered into the induction passage 321, the first specified winning opening (lottery device 300) is opened and the second specified winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is closed. On the other hand, in the round in which the lottery gate 310 is closed in the first hit type selection table 202b to restrict the game balls to the guiding passage 321, the first specified winning opening (drawing device 300) is closed and the second specified winning opening It is sufficient to open the (specified winning opening 65a).

  In the third embodiment and the modification of the third embodiment, the lottery device 300 is provided inside one specified winning opening (large opening) 65a. However, two special winning openings (large opening) are provided. One is provided (specific winning a prize opening (large opening mouth) 65a1, 65a2), the game ball which wins in the special winning a prize opening (large opening mouth) 65a1 is configured to flow down to the near side of the rotating body 341 The game ball that has won the mouth (large opening) 65a2 may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. Then, in the round where it is defined that the lottery gate 310 is opened in the first hit type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is opened and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is closed. Do. On the other hand, in the round where it is defined that the lottery gate 310 is closed in the first hit type selection table 202b, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a1 is closed and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a2 is opened. do it. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide the lottery gate 310 and the traveling direction distribution unit 330, so the lottery apparatus 300 can be made compact.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 81, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, when it is detected that the ball enters the definite insertion ball opening 502 or the definite change entrance ball opening 504, the voice lamp control device 113 is shifted to the loop state which is an advantageous state for the player. Are configured to send a command (loop status command) indicating. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the fluctuation pattern in a special mode for the loop state based on receiving the loop state command, and can suggest that the player is currently in the advantageous state. It was configured as.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation pattern effect, the display effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit is executed in a mode according to the state of the lottery device 300 etc. It is configured to be able to.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the stop symbol of the big hit is stopped, the lottery device 300 performs lottery of whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol before the start of the big hit game. Although configured, in this embodiment, the lottery gate 310 of the lottery apparatus 300 is opened at the start of the eighth round, which is the final round, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a high probability state of special symbols. Is configured as.

  The point in which the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in configuration is that the voice lamp control device 113 stores a big hit battle variation pattern table 222b and a big hit battle selection table 222c in the ROM 222. And the state flag 223 f is provided in the RAM 223. The partial process included in the command determination process (FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. The other configurations, various processes executed by the main control unit 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 are described in the first embodiment. Are identical to the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In addition to the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a big hit battle variation pattern table 222 b and a big hit battle selection table 222 c. In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment is provided with a status flag 223f. The other configuration is the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The jackpot battle variation pattern table 222b is used to determine the detailed aspect of the variation pattern based on the aspect of the rough variation pattern notified by the variation pattern command as in the variation pattern table 222a, and the variation pattern For each rough aspect of the variation pattern notified by the command, a plurality of detailed variation pattern aspects that can be selected are defined. The difference between the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b and the fluctuation pattern table 222a is that the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b defines a variation pattern effect presentation mode in which a jackpot win is notified.

  The jackpot during battle selection table 222c defines the aspect of the display effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, and has different selectable effect modes according to the state of the lottery apparatus 300, etc. .

  The state flag 223f is a flag indicating which of the state A to the state F currently defined in the state setting table (not shown) is present, and selects the mode of the fluctuation pattern from the jackpot battle fluctuation pattern table 222b. In the case (see S2713 in FIG. 80) or in the case of selecting an effect mode during a big hit from the big hit / middle battle selection table 222c (see S4206 in FIG. 81), this flag is taken into consideration.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75 to FIG. 78, when the jackpot in the present embodiment is a jackpot, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot The presentation mode will be described.

  FIG. 75 is a state setting table showing the flow of effects of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. This state setting table is set in the ROM 222. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states, state A, state C, and state E, as the states when the third pattern display device 81 performs a fluctuation pattern effect that becomes a big hit, and each state In, the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation pattern production | presentation selected is different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, there are three states B, D, and F as states when the display effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the big hit game, In each state, the effect mode of the selected display effect is different.

  In states A to F, a story effect is executed, and it is suggested whether it is a loop state or whether to shift to a high probability state of a special symbol depending on the result of the executed effect. Is configured. Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the presentation aspect of the presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described in order from the state A.

  State A refers to normal state (ie, low probability state of special symbol), and even if the jackpot type of jackpot won during the stay in state A is jackpot A or jackpot B A common presentation is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the state A, in the variation pattern production in which the jackpot is notified, the character of the main character with the shield and the sword searches for an enemy monster and a presentation until the encounter is performed . In this effect, it is possible to meet a monster, and a stop symbol indicating a jackpot is fixedly displayed at the timing when a battle (battle) starts. Further, when the stop symbol indicating the big hit is determined and displayed and the big hit game is started, the state shifts to state B (see state A in FIG. 75).

  In addition, in the out-of-range variation effect, although the main character searches for an enemy, an effect that the enemy can not be found (can not meet the enemy) is executed. As a result, since it can not be determined whether the jackpot or the jackpot will be lost at the time when the effect for searching for the enemy is started, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 to the end. .

  FIG. 76 (a) shows the display content in the case where the stop symbol is finalized and displayed in the effect performed in the state A. FIG. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the character "Start battle!" Is displayed above the scene where the main character and the enemy are staring at each other, and the battle between the main character and the enemy is started from now on. Is notified to In the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, a state in which three "8" symbols are aligned is displayed. In addition, as above-mentioned, the stop symbol at the time of a big hit is not limited to "8".

  Below the main character and the enemy, HP gauges indicating the hit points of the respective characters are displayed. The HP gauge is a gauge that represents the vitality of each character, and in the battle between the main character and the enemy, the gauge decreases when the opponent is attacked, and becomes knocked out when the gauge becomes zero. Details will be described later, but if the hero's HP gauge is exhausted due to the enemy's attack, the player is suggested to shift to a low probability state of special symbol after the end of the big hit, conversely by the attack of the hero If the enemy's HP gauge reaches 0, it is suggested to the player that the special symbol high probability state be entered after the big hit.

  In the state B, the stop symbol indicating the big hit in the state A is determined and displayed, and the big hit game is started. In this state B, the final round of the jackpot, the eighth round, is the final stage of the battle production between the main character and the enemy, and whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol or to the low probability state of the special symbol is It is suggested.

  Specifically, if the main character attacks the enemy and sets the HP gauge of the enemy to 0, and is able to destroy the enemy, it is suggested that it will transition to a high probability state of special symbol after the end of the jackpot . On the other hand, if the main character is attacked by the enemy and the HP gauge of the main character has become 0, it is suggested that the state changes to a special symbol low probability state after the big hit ends. Moreover, when it transfers to the high probability state of the special symbol in the state B, it transfers to the state C, but when it transfers to the low probability state of the special symbol, it transfers to the state A. That is, as long as the jackpot A is won and the state is not shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol, the state A and the state B are repeated (see the state B in FIG. 75).

  A state C is a state in which an effect in which the main character wins the enemy in state B is performed, and a transition is made after the end of the jackpot game in which the victory effect was performed. The difference from state A is that when a jackpot is won in state A, the symbol indicating the jackpot is displayed and then the state B is shifted to, while when a jackpot is won in state C, the jackpot is The difference is that transition to state D is made after the symbol to be shown is confirmed and displayed (see state C in FIG. 75).

  The state D is a state in which the stop symbol indicating the big hit in the state C is determined and displayed, and the big hit game is started. Also in this state D, if the main character can set the enemy's hit point to 0 in the eighth round which is the final round of the jackpot as in the state B, it is suggested that the jackpot transition to the special symbol high probability state after the jackpot end Be done.

  On the other hand, unlike the state B, in the state C, even if the main character is attacked by the enemy, the HP gauge does not completely become 0, but is in a pinched state. State D is a state where it shifts only when it moves to the high probability state of special symbol in state B, but when it moves to the high probability state of special symbol in state B, it entered the lottery apparatus 300 In this case, the gaming balls enter the probability changing ball entrance 501 after rotating the state of the allocation rotating body 341 to the left-side arrangement (see FIG. 13). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game being performed in state D, it has been decided to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol regardless of the jackpot type, suggesting to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol It is not necessary to perform the presentation where the HP gauge of the main character becomes zero.

  However, in the state where the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left, when the big hit B is won, the gaming ball entering the lottery apparatus 300 will be distributed to the guiding passage 408 c of the distribution rotating body 341. As you enter the ball into the probability change ball entrance 503 after turning the state to the right facing arrangement (see FIG. 14), if you win the jackpot B again next time, it shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol It is likely to be

  For this reason, when the jackpot type is jackpot B in state D, the main character is attacked by the enemy in the display effect to indicate that there is a risk of shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol after the next jackpot. Is configured to perform an effect that becomes a pinch. Further, the effect of becoming a pinch is executed, and after the jackpot is finished, the state shifts to state E (see state D in FIG. 75).

  FIG. 76 (b) shows an effect to be performed in the final round (eighth round) of the jackpot B when the jackpot B is won in the state C and the state D shifts. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the main character is attacked by the enemy's rush, and the HP has been significantly reduced. By placing the main character in a pinched state by the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is possible for the player to be in a state that is disadvantageous for the player (a state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right) It can be easily recognized.

  In FIG. 76 (b), after being attacked by the enemy's rush, the hero is blown away by the impact of the rush, and both the hero and the enemy lose sight of each other. Therefore, although the details will be described later, in the state E in which transition is made after the end of the jackpot game, an effect is performed in which the main character searches for an enemy again.

  Further, in the state D, when the jackpot type is the jackpot A, since the gaming ball entered in the lottery apparatus 300 flows down the guiding passage 408d, the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341 remains changed to the left. Since there is not (see FIG. 15), the state C is entered again. That is, as long as the jackpot B is won and it does not shift to the low probability state of the special symbol, the state C and the state D are repeated (see the state D in FIG. 75).

  The state E is a state in which the jackpot is won in the state C, and in the state D, the main character is attacked by the enemy and transferred after being produced as a pinch effect, similar to the state A and the state C, the main character An effect is performed that the jackpot is determined if the player searches for the enemy and can encounter the enemy. On the other hand, in the state E, preliminary effects which are not performed in the state A or the state C are performed when searching for the enemy or when the enemy is met.

  Specifically, when the hero discovers medicinal herbs while searching for an enemy (see FIG. 77 (a)) or encounters an enemy, an effect is performed in which the character of the dog who is a friend of the hero is assisted by the hero (See FIG. 77 (b)). The discovery of medicinal herbs can suggest that in state D there is a possibility of recovering the damage from the attack received from the enemy, and it can suggest that the ability to fight against the enemy will be improved if a companion is added.

  These effects are easily performed if the jackpot winning in state E is the jackpot A, and are not easily performed if the jackpot winning is the jackpot B (see state E in FIG. 75), either By performing such effects, the player's expectation for defeating the enemy can be increased. When the jackpot is won in the state E, the state transition is made to the state F after the symbol indicating the jackpot is determined and displayed (see the state E in FIG. 75).

  In the state F, the stop symbol indicating the big hit in the state E is determined and displayed, and the big hit game is started. In this state F as well as in the state B and the state D, if attacking the enemy and setting the HP gauge of the enemy to 0, it is suggested to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end. However, in the state F, the HP gauge may decrease or the fellow characters may join, so the state is different from the state B or the state D.

  Specifically, in the case of transition to a high probability state of special symbol after the end of the jackpot, an effect of defeating the enemy is executed in the display mode as shown in FIG. 78 (a), and the low probability of the special symbol is performed after the big hit. When shifting to the state, an effect of defeating the enemy is executed in the manner of display as shown in FIG. 78 (b). If the enemy wins, the state shifts to state C after the end of the jackpot, and if the enemy loses, the state shifts to state A after the jackpot ends.

  In the case of winning the enemy in the state F, an effect is performed in which the HP gauge recovers after the victory and the HP recovers to the perfect state. As a result, since the HP is always in the complete state in the state C, only by checking the HP of the main character, it is confirmed whether the present state is advantageous (i.e., the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left). can do.

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment. The command determination process (S1312) is a process that is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) of the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above.

  Of the command determination processing of the voice lamp control device 113, in the processing of S1401, S1403 to S1410, and S1419, S1401 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 40) of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing of S1403 to S1410 and S1419 is executed. Then, in the command determination process of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S1401 is completed, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421) is substituted for the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment. Run. The fluctuation pattern selection process 2 is a process for selecting the fluctuation pattern effect according to each of the state A, the state C, and the state E described above.

  If the determination result in the process of S1408 is No, it is determined whether or not a command related to the jackpot game has been received (S1422). The commands relating to the jackpot game include all commands relating to the jackpot, such as the round number command, the opening command, and the interval command.

  If it is determined in the process of S1422 that a command regarding the jackpot game has been received (S1422: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1423), and the present process is ended. The jackpot effect process (S1423) is a process for setting the display effect during the jackpot in the state B, the state D, and the state F described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that the command related to the jackpot game is not received (S1422: No), the processing according to the other commands is executed (S1419), and the present processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, fluctuation pattern selection processing 2 (S1421) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern selection process 2.

  Of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1421), in the process of S2701, the same process as the process of S2701 of the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 41) in the first embodiment is executed. Then, in the variation pattern selection process 2 in the fourth embodiment, when the process of S2701 ends, next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 indicates a variation pattern of the big hit. (S2711).

  In the process of S2711, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the big hit is shown (S2711: Yes), next, the status flag 223f is set from the state setting table (FIG. 75) and the big hit type (S2712), Next, based on the setting contents of the state flag 223f, the variation pattern for the jackpot is selected (S2713), and this processing is ended. For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state E and the jackpot type is the jackpot A, an effect of encountering the enemy is performed with an effect of acquiring a medicinal herb and an effect of an associate coming to the support.

  If it is determined in the process of S2711 that the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is not indicated (that is, it is a fluctuation pattern of deviation), the fluctuation pattern for deviation is extracted from the received command (S2714), and this processing is ended. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the jackpot effect process (S1423) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing this jackpot effect process.

  In the jackpot effect process (S1423), it is first determined whether or not an opening command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that an opening command has been received (S4201: Yes), a state setting table (FIG. 75), A status flag is set from the jackpot type (S4202). For example, when the state flag 223f indicates the state C and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the state flag is updated to one indicating the state D (see the state D in FIG. 75).

  Then, the pattern of the jackpot effect is set based on the state of the set state flag 223 f (S 4203), and the present process is ended. For example, if the state flag 223f is a setting indicating the state D and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the main character is attacked by the enemy and the effect of becoming a pinch is set as the jackpot effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S4201 that the opening command has not been received, it is determined whether or not the player entered the ball entrance different from the setting of the state flag 223f (S4204). For example, if the setting of the state flag 223f indicates the state B, and the jackpot type is the jackpot B, the gaming ball should enter the time saving ball entrance 501, but for the pachinko machine 10 When entering the ball to any of the definite change ball entrance 502-504 due to the reason such as the vibration was added, the jackpot is finished even though it is decided that the main character is going to be defeated Since a transition to a high probability state of special symbols is made later, there is a possibility that the player may feel discomfort.

  Therefore, if it is determined in the process of S4204 that the player entered the ball entrance different from the setting of the status flag 223f (S4204: Yes), the enemy is attacked and falls according to the type of the different ball entrance. The main character sets up the effect of attacking the enemy and setting a direction for defeating the enemy, or setting the effect that the defeated enemy gets up and attacks the main character, and the main character loses the reverse direction The process ends (S4205).

  By performing the processing of S4205, it is possible to match the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, and the result of the display effect during the big hit, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot and the result of the display effect during the big hit It is possible to suppress giving the player a sense of incongruity due to the generation of wrinkles.

  In the process of S4204, when it is determined that the player has not entered the ball entrance different from the setting of the state flag 223f (that is, entered the ball entrance as set by the state flag 223f) (S4204: No) The mode of the display effect during the jackpot is set based on the jackpot effect pattern set in the process of S4203 (S4206), and the process ends.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment is configured to execute a series of effects with a story based on the state of the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery apparatus 300, the winning jackpot type, etc. ing. Moreover, these series of effects are configured to be executed in the fluctuation pattern effect in which the stop symbol of the big hit is displayed and the display effect in the big hit game executed after the change pattern effect.

  Thereby, the game ball which entered the lottery gate 310 of the lottery device 300 enters any of the ball entry ports among the ball entry ports (time short entry ball entry 501 and probability change entry ball openings 502-504) Even if you missed it, by checking the result of the display effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, you can easily recognize whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end be able to.

  Also in the present embodiment, the distribution rotating body 341 of the lottery apparatus 300 is configured to be visible to the player, and the player can check the distribution rotating body 341 to obtain an advantageous state for the player (ie, It is comprised so that it can be recognized whether it is a state where the distribution rotary body 341 has swung to the left. However, when a player who is not accustomed to playing a game plays a game, the player may play the game without knowing what is different between the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right and the state in which the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the display effect during the big hit game not only can indicate whether to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit, but also in the high probability state of the special symbol, the HP of the main character It is possible to recognize whether or not the current state is advantageous depending on whether it is a sufficient state which is sufficient or a state where the HP is decreasing. Therefore, even a player who is not accustomed to playing a game can easily recognize whether the current state is advantageous.

  In the present embodiment, only two types of the HP gauge of the main character, that is, the pinch state or the perfect state are provided, but other states may be provided. For example, in addition to the perfect condition and the pinch condition, an HP gauge is reduced by about 20%, an HP gauge is reduced by half, and an HP gauge is reduced by about 70%. Also good. In this case, the state of the HP gauge of the main character can be stored in the RAM 223, and while the high probability state of the special symbol continues, the HP gauge is held, the special symbol It may be configured to be reset when transitioning to the low probability state of As a result, since the display effect can be shifted in a natural flow including the HP gauge, it is possible to suppress giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery by the lottery apparatus 300 is performed in the eighth round, but the lottery may be performed in another round. In addition, after the stop design indicating the big hit is displayed, it may be configured to draw a lottery before the start of the big hit game.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, a plurality of jackpot types are provided, and by changing the direction of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b according to the jackpot type, the route through which the game ball passes is made the front route or the back route. It was decided. On the other hand, it may be configured to randomly select whether the route through which the game ball entered the lottery apparatus 300 passes is the near route or the far route. That is, the jackpot type may be configured not to affect the flow path of the game ball flowing down in the lottery device 300. As a configuration for distributing the flow paths of the game balls at random, for example, a well-known lock means (two-hole land) having two through holes may be provided instead of the flow path switching valves 331a and 331b. . Then, when the gaming ball having reached the two hole crowne passes through the through hole of one of the two through holes of the two hole clavne, it flows down to the front side of the distribution rotating body 341 and the other through hole When it passes, it may be configured to flow down to the back side of the distribution rotating body 341. By configuring in this way, it is determined whether the game balls flow down to the front side of the rotating body 341 or flow back to the back side until the game balls actually pass through any of the through holes of the two hole claves. It can be made unidentifiable. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation for the game ball to pass through the route on the near side which is advantageous for the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 turned on, the setting of the allocation rotating body 341 is reset to the state of swinging to the right (outward state). Although it was configured as described above, without changing the arrangement of the distribution rotating body 341, each ball entry port (time-shortened ball entry port 501, and probability variation entry ball ports 502 to 504) and a state of transition after a big hit You may comprise so that correspondence may be changed. That is, based on the detection result of the position detection sensor 263, when it is determined that the state of the distribution rotating body 341 is in the state of swinging to the left (the state of facing up), It changes to the setting to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end, and changes to the setting to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the big hit end when the game ball enters the definite change ball entrance 504. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up by turning on the power, initial setting can be performed only by changing the setting of the ball entrance by software, so that the distributing rotary body 341 can be returned to the initial position. The motion motor 264 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the sorting rotor 341 is divided into a rectangular floor portion 401, a pair of rectangular passage walls 402, and the guide passages 408b and 408c from the floor portion 401 below the shaft 406 to the floor portion 401. And a pair of inclined portions 403b and 405b extending in an oblique direction, and ball stoppers 403a and 405a provided at the end opposite to the floor portion 401 of the inclined portions 403b and 405b. However, the distribution rotating body 341 is not limited to this shape. For example, it may have a windmill shape.

  In the above embodiment, the guiding passage 408a of the sorting rotor 341 and the guiding passage 408d are extended to the downstream side of the shaft 406, and the gaming ball flowing down the guiding passage 408a or the guiding passage 408d is the shaft 406. Even if it passes, it is comprised so that it may flow down on the floor part 401 (refer FIG.12 (b), FIG.15 (b)). On the other hand, of the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d, the passage downstream of the shaft 406 may be eliminated. The passage downstream of the shaft 406 may be provided on the side of the cover portion 423 instead of deleting the passage downstream of the shaft 406 of the distribution rotary body 341. That is, the guide passage 408a and the guide passage 408d downstream of the shaft 406 are provided on the front right back side of the cover portion 423 and on the front left side of the cover portion 423 in front view. Then, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the right around the shaft 406, the guide passage 408a of the distribution rotating body 341 and the path on the back right side of the cover portion 423 engage with each other, as in the above embodiment. It is configured to form a guiding passage similar to the guiding passage 408a. In addition, when the distribution rotating body 341 swings to the left around the shaft 406, the guide passage 408d of the distribution rotating body 341 and the path on the left front side of the cover portion 423 engage with each other, and the induction of the above embodiment is performed. It forms an induction passage similar to the passage 408d. Thereby, on the downstream side of the shaft 406, it is possible to suppress the load by the weight of the gaming ball from being applied to the passage, so the sorting is performed when the gaming ball passes through the guiding passage 408a or the guiding passage 408d. It is possible to reliably prevent the rotating body 341 from rotating with the weight of the gaming ball and swinging to the opposite side.

  In the fourth embodiment, as an aspect of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, an effect in which the main character and the enemy fight is executed is executed, and the main character wins the enemy in the display effect during the big hit game By doing this, it was suggested to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after this big hit end, and to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the next big hit end. On the other hand, it is possible to prepare an effect that makes it clear that the main character will win, without confirming the result of the battle with the enemy until the end. For example, when transitioning to the high probability state of the special symbol after the current and the next jackpot end, a palm-sized enemy may appear with a certain probability (for example, 10%). The appearance of an enemy whose size is significantly smaller than that of a normal enemy makes it possible for the player to be convinced that the main character wins when the enemy appears. In addition, the main character discovers a treasure box containing treasure without encountering the enemy with a certain probability (for example, 10% when winning a big hit A) during the fluctuation effect that becomes a big hit in the state A, the state C and the state E You may comprise so that the production | presentation to be performed may be performed. Then, in the jackpot game after the effect of discovering the treasure is performed, the effect of bringing the treasure back to the family may be performed. The effect of discovering treasure can be made to convince the player to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the current and next jackpots before the jackpot game starts. . As described above, by giving a plurality of variations to the effect, not only the expectation for the high probability state of the special symbol continuing, but also the expectation for the rare effect to be performed can be exhibited. It is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In addition, the present invention may be implemented to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to slot machines and pachinko machines, various types of game machines may be implemented, such as arelapi and ball ball, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols and does not include a handle for ball launch. The thing is mentioned. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined each one part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Below, in addition to the pachinko machine of this invention, the concept of the various inventions contained in embodiment mentioned above is shown.

<Characteristic group A> (structure of features for determining the probability variation of 2 times)
A ball entrance where game balls can enter and a first area and a second area where game balls entered into the ball entrance can enter, and either one of the first area and the second area The game player is further provided with a sorting means for sorting the game ball entered into the entry ball opening, and based on the game ball entering the first area, the player than when the game ball enters the second area. In the gaming machine which is transitioned to a special gaming state advantageous to the first aspect, the sorting means is in a first state in which gaming balls can be distributed to the first area, and to the first area or the second area. Variable means capable of changing the game ball to a second state in which the game ball can be distributed, and first and second flow paths through which the game ball can pass when in the first state And the third flow path and the fourth flow path through which the game ball can pass when in the second state. When the game ball passes through the second flow path, the variable means changes the distribution means from the first state to the second state, and the game ball passes through the third flow path. In this case, the game machine A1 is characterized in that the distribution means is varied from the second state to the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the distributing means can distribute the gaming ball to the first area or the second area by the variable means in a state in which the gaming ball can be distributed to the first area. It is changed to the 2nd state which is a state. In the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. . Here, when the gaming ball passes through the second flow path, the variable means changes the state of the sorting means from the first state to the second state, and the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, The variable means changes the state of the distribution means from the second state to the first state. As a result, if the sorting means is changed to the first state, the game ball is sorted to the first area and shifted to the special gaming state in the next sorting performed by the sorting means to the player It can be made to recognize. Therefore, after the distribution means is changed to the first state, the player feels at ease and satisfaction with the transition to the special game state until distribution is performed by the distribution means next time. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game while holding it.

  In the gaming machine A1, the third flow path is to cause the passing game balls to enter the first area, and the fourth flow path is to cause the passing game balls to enter the second area. A game machine A2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the game ball having passed the third flow path enters the first area and the game ball having passed the fourth flow path enters the second area, the game ball passes the third flow path The game ball enters the first area and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the distribution means is changed to the first state. Therefore, since it can be made to shift to the special game state advantageous to the player continuously, the player who recognizes that the game ball has transitioned to the special game state based on the passage of the third flow path There is an effect that it is possible to have a sense of security and satisfaction with the continuation of the special gaming state.

  In the game machine A1 or A2, a game machine A3 characterized in that the variable means can change the state of the distribution means based on the weight of the passing game ball.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the state of the distribution means is varied by the variable means based on the weight of the passing game ball, the state of the distribution means can be varied by the variable means in a natural operation. Therefore, the state of the distribution means can be changed at an unnatural timing, so that the player can be prevented from having a sense of mistrust with the gaming machine or the hall.

  In the gaming machines A1 to A3, the variable means includes variable suppressing means for suppressing change in the state of the distributing means in a state where the game balls are not passing through.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the switching of the state of the distributing means in the state where the game ball is not passing is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the distributing means is firstly different from the timing when the distributing means is changed by the variable means. It is possible to prevent the player from being damaged or having a sense of distrust from the gaming machine or the hall by switching from the state to the second state.

<Feature B group> (Perform display effects according to the flow path for the two-time loop and the state of the structure)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, the success / failure determination means for executing the success / failure determination, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means, and the effect of the identification information displayed on the display means The effect mode specifying means for specifying the mode, the bonus game executing means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed, and the bonus game executing means A game state specifying means for specifying which one of the first game state and the second game state which is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is to be performed after the game is executed. And a continuous setting means for setting the gaming state specifying means to a continuous state in which the second gaming state is likely to be specified a plurality of times continuously, and the continuous state by the continuous setting means Falling setting means for ending the set continuous state when it is set and setting to the falling state where the first gaming state is easy to be specified by the gaming state specifying means; and the continuous setting means Effect mode changing means for changing the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means based on whether the continuation state is set or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means A game machine B1 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B1, the continuous state setting unit sets the continuous game state specifying unit to the continuous state which is likely to be specified a plurality of times in succession to the second gaming state. When the gaming state specifying means is set to the continuous state, the continuous state is ended by the fall setting means, and the falling state is set in which the first gaming state is easily specified. Here, the effect mode specified by the effect mode specifying means is changed based on whether the continuous mode is set by the effect mode changing means or the falling state is set by the fall state setting means. Ru. Thus, the player can determine whether or not the current state is the continuous state only by confirming the effect mode displayed on the display means, so that the mode indicating the continuous state as the effect mode is displayed. As a result, the player can have a sense of security that the second gaming state is likely to be identified several times in succession.

  In the gaming machine B1, after the identification information indicating the predetermined success / failure determination result is displayed, and before the end of the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution unit, the identification is performed by the gaming state identification unit The indication display control means for controlling the display means to display the indication effect indicating the state is provided, and the indication display control means suggests that the specified result by the game state specifying means is the second game state To control the display effect to be displayed on the display means, the display is performed based on whether the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means or the fall state is set by the fall state setting means A game machine B2 characterized by specifying a suggested effect to be caused.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when controlling the display effect to indicate that the specified result by the game state specifying means is the second game state to be displayed on the display means, the indication display control means identifies a predetermined success or failure determination result After the information is displayed and before the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game execution means ends, the display means is controlled to display a suggested effect suggesting the state specified by the game state identification means. Therefore, by displaying the suggested effect on the display means, it is possible to give the player a sense of security for being in a state in which the second gaming state is likely to be identified several times in succession. . In addition, since the player can be made to play the game expecting the suggestion effect to be displayed on the display means during the bonus game, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. is there.

  In the gaming machine B2, the continuous setting means sets the continuous state when the result specified by the gaming state specifying means is the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the continuation state is set by the continuation setting means when the specific result by the game state identification means is the second game state, the second game state is passed when it becomes the continuation state. Since it is possible to suppress the first gaming state from being reached until the specification is first made by the gaming state specifying means after entering the continuous state, the player continues the first gaming state. It is possible to suppress quitting the game before identification is performed by the game state identification means at first.

  In the gaming machine B3, the suggestion display control means can suggest that the continuation setting means has set the continuation state in the suggestion effect.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since it is suggested by the suggestion display control means that the continuation setting means sets the continuation state in the suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize that the continuation state is set. Therefore, since it is possible to recognize that the second gaming state has become likely to be identified several times in a row by being set to the continuous state, it is possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind. It has the effect of

<Features C group> (sorting of two stages at the time of probability variation lottery)
Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, based on the success or failure determination means performing the success or failure determination and the result of the success or failure determination by the success or failure determination means performing a bonus game advantageous to the player A bonus game execution means, and a second game state in which the first game state and the second game state are more advantageous to the player than the first game state after the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means. In the gaming machine having gaming state specifying means for specifying which state to be, the game state specifying means is based on a first lottery and a second lottery different from the first lottery. A first specific state for specifying a first gaming state and the second gaming state, and in which the first gaming state is more easily identified than the second gaming state as the first lottery, Its first specific state The second specific state is set as a first lottery means for drawing which one of the second specific state in which the second gaming state is likely to be specified is to be set. In this case, the gaming machine C1 is characterized by further comprising second drawing means for drawing whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than the second gaming state.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are respectively identified by the gaming state identification means based on the first lottery and the second lottery different from the first lottery. Then, as a first lottery, a first specific state in which the first gaming state is more easily identified than the second gaming state, and a second in which the second gaming state is more likely to be identified than the first specific state It is drawn by the first drawing means which one of the specific state is to be set. Here, as a second lottery, the second lottery means whether or not to set a special state in which the second gaming state is more easily specified than in the second gaming state even when the second specific state is set. Be done. As a result, in the specification of one game state by the game state specifying means, since the opportunity of two times of the drawing of the drawing by the first drawing means and the drawing by the second drawing means is given, the drawing is made for the player. It can make you feel that you have an increased opportunity. In addition, even if the result of the lottery by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, it is expected that the second lottery means will be the lottery result in which the special state is set without discouraging the player. Since it is possible to play a game, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy specifying the state by the game state specifying means.

  In the gaming machine C1, the second lottery means draws lottery whether or not to set the special state when specifying by the next game state specifying means based on the specification being performed by the game state specifying means A game machine C2 characterized by being a game.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the specification being performed by the gaming state specifying means, it is randomly selected by the second lottery means whether or not the special state is to be set when the next game state specifying means is specified. Thereby, even if the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the first specific state, if it is lottery that the special state is set by the second lottery means, the first identification by the first lottery means It is possible to reduce discouragement of the player for the fact that the state is drawn, it is possible to play the game looking forward to the specification will be performed in the special state when specified by the next game state specifying means. In addition, when the lottery result by the first lottery means indicates the second specific state and the lottery result by the second lottery means indicates the special state, the state advantageous to the player continues. Since the player can recognize, there is an effect that the player can be given a sense of security and a sense of satisfaction.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the gaming state specifying means is the bonus game executing means based on the ball entry port where the game ball can enter and the game ball entered into the ball entrance entering the ball. The benefit according to a first area in which the gaming state to be executed after execution of the bonus game is determined to be the first gaming state, and the gaming ball entering the ball entry entering the ball, the bonus The second lottery in which it is specified that the gaming state to be executed after the execution of the bonus game by the gaming executing means is the second gaming state, and the first lottery and the second lottery are performed to the ball entrance A game machine C3 characterized by determining whether to guide the game ball to the first area or to the second area by varying the flow-down direction of the entered game ball.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball entering the ball entrance entering the first area, the gaming state to be executed after the execution of the bonus game by the bonus game executing means becomes the first gaming state. It is specified by a specific means. Then, based on the game ball entering the ball entrance entering the second area, the gaming state to be executed after the execution of the score game by the bonus game execution means is set to the second gaming state. It is specified by a specific means. Here, it is determined by the first lottery and the second lottery whether the gaming ball is guided to the first area or the second area by varying the flow-down direction of the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance. As a result, the player can easily judge the result of the first lottery and the second lottery by simply confirming the flowing direction of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine C3, a gaming machine characterized in that the second lottery means lottery whether or not to set the special state based on the distribution of the gaming balls to the first area or the second area. C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on having been allocated to the first area or the second area, whether or not the special state is to be set is drawn by the second drawing means, so that the timing of the drawing performed by the player by the second drawing means There is an effect that can be easily recognized.

  In the gaming machine C4, in the special state, the first flow path and the second flow path through which gaming balls are allowed to pass, and in the special state, the passage of the gaming ball is restricted in the third state A second flow path and a fourth flow path are provided, and the second lottery means determines that the special state is to be set when the game ball passes the third flow path, and the second flow path When the game ball passes, it is determined to release the special state. A game machine C5.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the special state, the gaming ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path. And, in the special state, the game ball is restricted from passing through the third passage or the fourth passage. Here, when the game ball passes the third flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is set. Further, when the game ball passes through the second flow path, it is determined by the second lottery means that the special state is released. As a result, the player can determine that the game ball has been set to the special state only by confirming that the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, and thus confirms that the gaming ball passes through the third flow path. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the player who made the game to play a game while giving a sense of security and satisfaction to the identification in the special state in the next identification by the gaming state identification means.

  In the gaming machine C5, the third flow path is to cause the passing game ball to enter the second area, and the fourth flow path is to cause the passing game ball to enter the first area. A game machine C6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C5, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the gaming ball having passed the third flow channel enters the second area and the gaming ball having passed the fourth flow channel enters the first area, the player passes the third flow channel. By recognizing that, it is possible to recognize transition to a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and that the next lottery performed by the second lottery means will be performed in a special state. Therefore, there is an effect that a player who recognizes that the game ball has passed through the third flow path can be given a great sense of satisfaction and a sense of security against the continuation of the advantageous state.

<Feature D group> (suppressing that two or more game balls enter the sorting means)
A ball entrance where game balls can enter and a first area and a second area where game balls entered into the ball entrance can enter, and either one of the first area and the second area A sorting means for sorting the game ball entered into the entry ball opening, and a switching means for switching to the entry permission state for permitting the game ball to enter the ball entry passage for a predetermined period of time based on the establishment of the predetermined condition A transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second area based on the game ball entering the first area; The distribution means can be varied between a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first area and a second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second area. A game ball having entered into the ball entrance reached the sorting means, and the variable means is provided. In this case, the game machine D1 is characterized by further comprising: a restriction means for restricting the arrival of the game ball entering the ball entrance after the game ball to the sorting means, at least while the ball entry is permitted. .

  According to the gaming machine D1, the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance is distributed to either one of the first area and the second area by the distributing means, and the gaming ball is distributed to the ball entrance based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. It is permitted to enter the ball for a predetermined period by the switching means. Then, based on the game ball entering the first area, the transition means transfers the gaming state to a special gaming state more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second area. . Further, the distributing means is changed by the variable means into a first state in which the game ball can be distributed to the first area and a second state in which the game ball is easily distributed to the second area. Here, when one gaming ball entering the ball entrance reaches the sorting means, it is at least entered that the gaming ball entering the ball entrance following the gaming ball reaches the sorting means While in the ball permission state, it is limited by the limiting means. Thus, it is possible to suppress that two or more gaming balls are distributed to the first area or the second area by the distribution means in one distribution by the distribution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a plurality of gaming balls from being divided into separate areas in one distribution and to cause the gaming machine to malfunction.

  The gaming machine D1 is provided with a pass / fail determination means for executing a pass / fail determination based on establishment of the lottery condition, and when the determination result of the pass / fail determination means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction means is released. A game machine D2 characterized in that it comprises releasing means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, on the basis of the establishment of the lottery condition, the acceptance determination is performed by the determination unit. Then, when the success or failure judgment result of the success or failure judgment means is a predetermined result, the restriction by the restriction means is canceled by the restriction cancellation means. In this way, since the distribution by the distribution means can be made to be made every time the judgment result by the success / failure judgment means becomes a predetermined result, the player can judge the result by the judgment by the success / failure judgment means and the distribution by the distribution means. The results can be confirmed separately. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  A game machine D3 characterized by comprising discharge means for discharging the game ball whose arrival to the distribution means is restricted by the restriction means to the outside of the game area in the game machine D1 or D2.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the game balls whose arrival at the distribution means is restricted by the restriction means are discharged out of the game area by the discharge means, the game balls whose arrival at the distribution means are restricted remain in the game area, It can be suppressed that the game ball which has been held is used as it is at the time of distribution by the next distribution means. As a result, when the sorting by the sorting means is performed, it is possible to cause the player to hit the game ball to the entrance every time when the sorting is performed, so the sorting by the sorting means may be performed at the timing of the player's preference. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest for the game.

  In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the variable means is that the game ball entered into the ball entrance by the distribution means is distributed to one of the first area and the second area. The game machine D4 is characterized in that it is made variable based on either one of the first state and the second state.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, based on the game ball having entered the ball entrance being distributed to any one of the first area and the second area by the distributing means, the distributing means has the first state and the second state by the variable means. Variable to one of the states. By defining the timing at which the state of the distribution means is switched, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the distribution means switches.

  In the gaming machine D4, a variable suppressing means for suppressing change to any one of the first state and the second state by the variable means in a state where the game ball does not reach the distributing means A game machine D5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, it is suppressed by the variable suppressing means that the changing means changes the game ball to any one of the first state and the second state when the game ball has not reached the distributing means. As a result, the distributing means is switched from the first state to the second state at a timing different from the timing at which the distributing means is changed by the variable means, causing damage to the player, or to the gaming machine or hall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of mistrust.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine is a slot machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1 to C6, and D1 to D5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

<Others>
In game machines such as pachinko machines, we will draw a lottery whether it will be a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening, and separately draw a lot during the big hit about whether or not to shift to probability fluctuation state. Thus, it is suppressed that the jackpot becomes a mere work to get a lot of balls, and the player is made to play the game during the jackpot with an expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, and the interest for the player's game is improved. There is something I'm trying to do.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, there are some gaming machines in which a plurality of routes through which gaming balls can pass are provided in a predetermined area where entry of gaming balls is possible only when lottery of probability fluctuation state is performed. In this gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation state will be made after the big hit is finished, depending on which route the game ball is distributed among the plurality of routes provided in the predetermined area (for example, patent documents 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).
However, in such a gaming machine, although it is possible to draw a lottery whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the current big hit, it is possible to determine even transition to the probability fluctuation state after the next jackpot. It was not. As a result, each time a big hit, the player may feel anxious feeling that the player will leak in a lottery of probability fluctuation state, and even if he wins the big hit, the player does not feel rested There was a problem.

  The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and among the plurality of routes for performing the lottery of the probability variation state, the next probability is obtained according to the route through which the game ball passes. The game ball to a route other than the route to transition to the probability fluctuation state (the route to transition to the low probability state) by configuring the route that the gaming ball can pass at the time of the fluctuation state lottery changeable It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of providing a pattern in which the progress of the game is restricted, and capable of suppressing anxious feeling to the player each time a jackpot.

  In addition, in such a gaming machine, at the time of drawing whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state after the big hit, the game ball to the route other than the route to shift to the probability fluctuation state (route to shift to the low probability state) As it progressed, it had shifted to a low probability state without any room for reversal. As a result, the lottery becomes awkward and there is a possibility that the player can not sufficiently enjoy the lottery.

  The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems, and in the case of performing lottery of whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state, it is configured to perform lottery of multiple stages. Even if the lottery result of 1 indicates a disadvantage to the player, depending on the result of another lottery, it is possible to expect the winning of the probability fluctuation state, and the player can enjoy the lottery sufficiently. The purpose is to provide a playable gaming machine.

  Furthermore, in such a gaming machine, when two or more gaming balls enter a predetermined area for lottery in one lottery of whether to shift to a probability fluctuation state, the gaming ball is one lottery. However, there is a risk that the gaming machine may malfunction due to passing through a plurality of routes.

The present technical concept is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and a predetermined area for performing a lottery when performing lottery for whether or not to shift to a probability change state using a game ball. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing two or more gaming balls from entering.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 has a ball entry port where game balls can enter and a first area and a second area where game balls entered into the ball entrance can enter. And sorting means for sorting the gaming ball having entered the ball entrance into one of the first area and the second area, based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the first area, In a gaming machine which shifts to a special gaming state advantageous to the player than when the gaming ball enters the second area, the sorting means is capable of distributing the gaming ball to the first area. In the case of the first state, the variable means is capable of being varied between a certain first state and a second state in which gaming balls can be distributed to the first area or the second area. In the case of the first channel and the second channel through which the ball can pass, and the second state, the game ball The third flow path and the fourth flow path that are allowed to pass through are provided, and the variable means changes from the first state to the second state when the gaming ball passes through the second flow path. When the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, the sorting means is varied, and the sorting means is varied from the second state to the first state.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, wherein the third flow path is for entering the game ball passed through to the first area, and the fourth flow path is passed The game ball which has been set is entered into the second area.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, the variable means can change the state of the distributing means based on the weight of the passing game ball. .
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to the technical ideas 1 to 3, the variable means suppresses the variable state of the sorting means in a state where the game ball is not passing through. Means are provided.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the distributing means can distribute the gaming ball to the first area by the variable means, and the first state in which the gaming ball can be distributed to the first area or the second area. It is changed to the 2nd state which is a state which can distribute a ball. In the first state, the game ball can pass through the first flow path and the second flow path, and in the second state, the game ball can pass through the third flow path and the fourth flow path. . Here, when the gaming ball passes through the second flow path, the variable means changes the state of the sorting means from the first state to the second state, and the gaming ball passes through the third flow path, The variable means changes the state of the distribution means from the second state to the first state. As a result, if the sorting means is changed to the first state, the game ball is sorted to the first area and shifted to the special gaming state in the next sorting performed by the sorting means to the player It can be made to recognize. Therefore, after the distribution means is changed to the first state, the player feels at ease and satisfaction with the transition to the special game state until distribution is performed by the distribution means next time. There is an effect that it is possible to play the game while holding it.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, since the game ball having passed the third flow path enters the first area and the game ball having passed the fourth flow path enters the second area, the game ball passes the third flow path The game ball enters the first area and shifts to the special game state, and the state of the distribution means is changed to the first state. Therefore, since it can be made to shift to the special game state advantageous to the player continuously, the player who recognizes that the game ball has transitioned to the special game state based on the passage of the third flow path There is an effect that it is possible to have a sense of security and satisfaction with the continuation of the special gaming state.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, since the state of the distribution means is varied by the variable means based on the weight of the passing game ball, the state of the distribution means can be varied by the variable means in a natural operation. Therefore, the state of the distribution means can be changed at an unnatural timing, so that the player can be prevented from having a sense of mistrust with the gaming machine or the hall.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical ideas 1 to 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, since the switching of the state of the distributing means in the state where the game ball is not passing is suppressed by the variable suppressing means, the distributing means is firstly different from the timing when the distributing means is changed by the variable means. There is an effect that it is possible to switch from the state to the second state and to cause damages to the player or to have a sense of distrust to the gaming machine or the hall.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device 310 lottery gate (ball entering means)
331a, 331b flow path switching valve (part of state variable means)
341 Sorting rotary body (sorting means)
403a ball stopper (part of state variable means)
405a ball stopper (part of state variable means)
407a, 407b magnets (variable suppressing means)
408a Induction channel (4th channel)
408b Induction channel (third channel)
408c induction channel (second channel)
408d induction channel (first channel)
501 o'clock short ball entrance (second area)
502-504 Probable ball entry (first area)

Claims (2)

Entry means that can enter the game ball,
A first area and a second area where game balls entered into the entry means can enter the balls;
And sorting means for sorting the game ball having entered the ball entering means into any one of the first area and the second area,
A gaming machine configured to be able to shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than when the gaming ball enters the second area based on the game sphere entering the first area. ,
The distributing means is in a first state in which the game ball is distributed to the first area, and in a second state in which the game ball is more easily distributed to the second area than the first state. It is variable based on the weight of the game ball passing through the sorting means,
The gaming machine is
All SANYO the player a state of the distributing means is configured to be visible,
The gaming ball having reached the sorting means is configured to flow down any of the flow paths branched into the front side and the back side of the front view,
At least said than game balls having reached to the distributing means in the second state, flows down the front view rear side, the Rukoto person when flowing down the front view near side consists likely be beneficial to the player A game machine that features it.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a launcher capable of launching a game ball.

Images